{"title":"Spares \u0026 Accessories","description":"\u003cp\u003eExplore our extensive range of spares \u0026amp; accessories designed for commercial catering equipment. From replacement parts to essential add-ons, we provide everything you need to ensure your kitchen operates smoothly and efficiently. Shop with us for quality products that enhance your catering experience.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"0-8ltr-commercial-junior-cutter-bowl-for-herbs-and-nuts","title":"0.8Ltr Commercial Junior Cutter Bowl for Herbs and Nuts","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Junior Cutter Bowl is an essential component for anyone looking to efficiently process herbs, garlic, onions, and nuts. This versatile tool is perfect for chefs and cooking enthusiasts who demand speed and precision in their culinary tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from high-quality materials, this cutting bowl features a sharp blade designed for optimal performance. It offers an ideal solution for quickly and effectively chopping multiple ingredients, minimizing prep time and maximizing productivity in the kitchen. Unlike more complex food processors, this bowl is straightforward and easy to clean, making it a practical choice for busy environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.8Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 800g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Transparent\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact design fits easily into any kitchen setup.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSharp blade ensures a fast and efficient chopping experience.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, saving you valuable time after cooking.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for use with stick blenders for seamless integration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact design – Easily store it in limited kitchen spaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient sharp blade – Quick and precise cutting for various ingredients.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy visibility – Transparent material allows you to monitor progress at a glance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLow weight – Reduces fatigue during prolonged use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile use – Great for herbs, nuts, and more, enhancing diverse dish preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSimple cleanup – Dishwasher safe for hassle-free maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Stick Blender Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eFast and efficient preparation\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSpend less time chopping and more time enjoying your meals.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable and high-quality materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnjoy -lasting use, even in busy kitchens.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy integration with stick blenders\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eStreamline your food prep process with compatible tools.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Junior Cutter Bowl excels in various culinary settings, making it a must-have for different applications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants for quick ingredient prep.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services to manage large quantities efficiently.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens for everyday meal preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBaking enthusiasts for chopping nuts and herbs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCooking classes to demonstrate efficient food handling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnsure proper installation by aligning the cutter bowl securely with your stick blender. Regular maintenance includes cleaning with warm, soapy water or placing it in the dishwasher for ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the capacity of the Junior Cutter Bowl?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bowl has a capacity of 0.8 liters, ideal for small to medium food prep tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use this cutter bowl for chopping hard ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is designed to efficiently chop herbs, garlic, onions, and nuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the cutter bowl?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bowl is easy to clean and can be washed with warm, soapy water or placed in a dishwasher.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMaximize your preparation efficiency with the Junior Cutter Bowl. Order today to elevate your cooking experience!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810481193345,"sku":"GF341","price":923.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/950b191c7896a4fc7e60af197b98a23a.png?v=1781697682"},{"product_id":"1-25ltr-polycarbonate-container-for-commercial-blenders","title":"1.25Ltr Polycarbonate Container for Commercial Blenders","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.25Ltr Polycarbonate Container is the perfect solution for those who need a reliable and durable replacement or additional container for their commercial blenders. Designed for busy kitchens and foodservice environments, this accessory enhances your blending experience by providing convenience and efficiency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from high-quality polycarbonate, this container is not only clear for easy visibility but also robust enough to withstand the demands of a commercial setting. It addresses the common issue of needing spare parts in kitchens, ensuring that your blending tasks can continue seamlessly without downtime. The container’s comfortable handle simplifies pouring, allowing for precision and cleanliness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Polycarbonate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupplier Model Number\u003c\/strong\u003e 6126-908R-CE\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Clear\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.25Ltr \/ 44oz - with comfortable handle for easier pouring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStainless steel blades quickly cut through ice for smooth blending\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight construction for easy handling and transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTransparent design allows quick monitoring of contents\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDurable polycarbonate material ensures longevity in tough environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1.25Ltr capacity meets diverse blending needs, from smoothies to soups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic handle design for comfort, encouraging efficient pouring and serving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, minimizing downtime between uses.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFits seamlessly with the HBB908R-UK model for compatibility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManufacturer warranty provides peace of mind for your purchase.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-quality construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOffers durability and resistance to wear, ensuring it lasts longer in commercial use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClear design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAllows for easy monitoring of blending progress without stopping the machine.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFacilitates easy pouring, reducing mess and improving operational efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWide compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorks specifically with blenders, ensuring a perfect fit.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis spare container is versatile and excels in various settings, making it an essential addition to any kitchen. Ideal environments include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCafés need reliable blending for drinks and light meals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants preparing sauces or purees quickly and efficiently.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBakeries requiring smooth mixes for batters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBars creating frozen cocktails or smoothies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks blending fresh ingredients on-the-go.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1.25Ltr polycarbonate container is designed for easy installation with blenders, specifically the HBB908R-UK model. For optimal longevity, rinse immediately after use and periodically clean with mild detergent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat blenders are compatible with this container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis container is specifically designed to fit the HBB908R-UK commercial blender.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the container dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is recommended to wash the container by hand with mild detergent for best results.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes the container come with a warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it includes a 1-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvesting in the Commercial Spare 1.25Ltr Polycarbonate Container ensures that your blending tasks are always supported by a reliable accessory. Shop now to enhance your kitchen's efficiency and performance!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810500133249,"sku":"JB505","price":247.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/b64fe16ecea94f3cedda5a3cc4a7bbd5.png?v=1781697907"},{"product_id":"1-4l-commercial-air-whip-frothing-jar-for-blenders","title":"1.4L Commercial Air Whip Frothing Jar for Blenders","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Air Whip Frothing Jar is an essential accessory designed for professionals who demand high-quality results in their culinary creations. This replacement frothing jar enhances the capabilities of commercial blenders, making it perfect for tasks such as whipping cream, creating culinary foams, and emulsifying sauces. With a generous capacity of 1.4 liters, it's perfect for high-volume use in busy kitchen environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from robust polycarbonate, the frothing jar stands out for its durability and -lasting performance. Its clear design allows for easy monitoring of blending processes, ensuring precise results every time. This jar addresses the common issues of inefficiency and inconsistency, giving culinary professionals a reliable tool that ensures uniformity in their blending tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Polycarbonate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.4Ltr \/ 48oz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Clear\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemovable filler-cap lets you add ingredients while blending\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersatile container for culinary foams, whipped cream, emulsions, and more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy-read level indicator for proper measurement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCone agitator designed for maximum aeration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStrong construction ensures durability in high-use environments\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGenerous capacity allows for large batches, saving time in food prep.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemovable cap makes adding ingredients seamless without interrupting the blending process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClear material allows for visibility, enabling you to track the blending progress easily.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCone agitator maximizes aeration for superior foam quality.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy-read level indicator ensures precise measurements for reliable results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDurable polycarbonate construction withstands frequent use in commercial settings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurable construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProvides reliability, ensuring you won’t need frequent replacements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVersatile functionality\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBroadens your kitchen’s ability to create gourmet dishes effortlessly.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClear visibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImproves efficiency by allowing you to monitor blending without stopping.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEasy ingredient addition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSimplifies the process of making complex recipes, saving time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Air Whip Frothing Jar excels in various settings, including kitchens, cafes, and catering events. It is ideal for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhipping cream for desserts and pastries.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCreating foams for specialty coffee drinks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEmulsifying sauces and dressings for gourmet dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePreparing large batches of culinary elements for events and parties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaking smoothies and healthy drinks efficiently.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo ensure optimal performance, simply attach the frothing jar to compatible blenders such as. Hand wash the jar or place it in the dishwasher for easy cleaning. Avoid using abrasive materials to maintain its clarity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan this frothing jar be used with any blender?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis frothing jar is specifically designed for use with commercial blenders, particularly the.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the frothing jar dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the frothing jar can be washed in the dishwasher; however, hand washing is recommended to maintain its clarity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty period for this frothing jar?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Air Whip Frothing Jar comes with a 1-year warranty, ensuring your investment is protected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your blending capabilities with the Commercial Air Whip Frothing Jar. This jar ensures exceptional performance, allowing you to whip, foam, and emulsify with ease. Order today to elevate your culinary creations!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810502820225,"sku":"JB509","price":751.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/999b22e938c10226ef690a50affc1a69.png?v=1781697961"},{"product_id":"1-4l-commercial-blender-replacement-copolyester-container","title":"1.4L Commercial Blender Replacement Copolyester Container","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Copolyester Container is an essential accessory for users of commercial blenders. Designed for blending enthusiasts, this spare container provides flexibility and convenience for high-volume blending tasks. Its durable construction and smart features ensure optimal performance, allowing you to whip up smoothies, sauces, and other creations with ease.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from BPA-free co-polyester, the container is not only sturdy but also facilitates safe food preparation. It solves the common problem of needing an additional container for busy kitchens, making it an indispensable addition for restaurants, cafes, or catering services. With its ergonomic design and practical features, this spare container is engineered to enhance the blending experience while ensuring longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupplier Model Number\u003c\/strong\u003e 6126-455-CE\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Clear\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.4Ltr \/ 48oz. BPA-free co-polyester container\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eAll-metal clutch designed for durability and reliability. \n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemovable filler-cap allows for adding ingredients while blending for uninterrupted mixing. \n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLid-open sensor prevents accidental blending with the lid removed when paired with a compatible motor base. \n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTriple- lid to minimize spills and maintain freshness of blended contents. \n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic handle for comfortable operation and easy pouring. \n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStainless steel blade for efficient blending and precision cutting. \n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDurable construction ensures the container withstands rigorous use over time.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eBPA-free material provides peace of mind for your health-conscious clientele.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eGenerous capacity allows for preparing larger batches, reducing the need for multiple containers.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eIntuitive design facilitates easy cleaning and maintenance, saving you valuable time.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eThe transparent design makes it easy to monitor blending progress at a glance.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with various commercial blender models ensures you’re covered no matter your existing equipment.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-quality materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e -lasting container that resists wear and tear, minimizing replacement costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVersatile compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeamlessly integrates with your existing blender setup.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUser-friendly design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnhances efficiency in the kitchen, allowing you to focus on creativity rather than mechanics.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Copolyester Container is perfect for a variety of settings. Whether you're preparing fresh smoothies, sauces, or soups, this container excels in multiple applications. \u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eBusy restaurants needing quick batch preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCatering services requiring portable blending solutions.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHealth-focused cafes specializing in smoothies and juices.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks maximizing blending capacity in limited space.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHome kitchens aiming for results.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eFitting the spare container is straightforward and requires no special tools. Simply attach it to your compatible blender for optimal performance. For maintenance, regular cleaning and proper storage will prolong its lifespan.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat blenders are compatible with this container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis container fits,, and models of commercial blenders.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this container safe for food?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is made from BPA-free co-polyester, ensuring it is safe for food preparation.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty on this container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Copolyester Container comes with a one-year warranty against defects.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis container is an excellent addition for anyone reliant on blenders, providing efficiency and versatility in blending tasks. Order today to elevate your blending game and ensure you're always prepared for your culinary creations.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810505769345,"sku":"JB500","price":568.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/0c11ac0f0dbbab773b314007061a01ea.png?v=1781698009"},{"product_id":"1-4l-commercial-frothing-jar-bpa-free-co-polyester-countertop","title":"1.4L Commercial Frothing Jar BPA-Free Co-Polyester Countertop","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial 1.4Ltr Co-polyester Frothing Jar for is an essential tool for busy drink stations and kitchens. Designed for professionals who demand efficiency, this frothing jar allows seamless preparation of high-quality beverages, enabling your team to create exquisite textures with minimal training. Its thoughtful design ensures both convenience and functionality, making it a must-have for any establishment looking to enhance their drink offerings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from BPA-free co-polyester, this frothing jar combines durability with clarity, allowing you to easily monitor your ingredients. The generous 1.4Ltr (48oz) capacity and clear laser-etched measurements provide accuracy for every pour. Its ergonomic handle and mess-free spout eliminate the hassle often associated with pouring, while the removable filler cap allows for quick ingredient additions. Save space in your kitchen with its stackable design, making it an ideal choice for any bustling food service environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.4 Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Co-polyester\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Clear\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGenerous 1.4Ltr \/ 48oz capacity supports high volume beverage preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBPA-free construction ensures safety and peace of mind for your customers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e -lasting laser-etched measurements facilitate precise ingredient ratios.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eErgonomic design allows for easy and comfortable pouring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRemovable filler cap enables quick access for adding ingredients on the go.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStackable design maximizes storage efficiency in busy environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with series high-performance blenders for optimal results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStainless steel frothing disc enhances aeration for superior results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable BPA-free material provides safety and reliability in high-demand situations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLarge capacity minimizes the need for frequent refills during busy service hours.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eClear markings make it easy for staff to measure ingredients accurately with every use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eConvenient handle design reduces strain during repetitive tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eQuick access filler cap significantly streamlines the beverage-making process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatibility with blender series ensures perfect froth creation every time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eGenerous capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient service during peak hours, enabling quick beverage preparation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eBPA-free material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eCustomer safety is prioritized, enhancing your establishment's reputation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrecision measurements\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eConsistent drink quality that meets customer expectations every time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eErgonomic handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces fatigue for staff, allowing for prolonged use without discomfort.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial frothing jar excels in a variety of settings, making it a versatile addition to your kitchen equipment. Its design and functionality make it suitable for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCafés and coffee shops for preparing lattes and cappuccinos.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBars for crafting frothy cocktails and specialty drinks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants offering gourmet dining experiences with crafted beverages.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMobile food vendors who need reliable equipment on the go.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo maintain the Commercial frothing jar, ensure it is properly cleaned after each use. Compatible with the blender series, simply align and secure it for perfect frothing. Regularly check for wear and tear, particularly on the frothing disc, to ensure optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the frothing jar dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, it is recommended to wash the jar by hand to maintain its longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use this jar for both warm and cold liquids?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the co-polyester material is designed to handle both warm and cold ingredients effectively.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat kind of beverages can I prepare with this jar?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can create a variety of frothed beverages, including lattes, cappuccinos, and even cocktails that require aeration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in the Commercial 1.4Ltr Co-polyester Frothing Jar for and elevate your beverage preparation process. This essential tool combines durability, efficiency, and innovation, helping your team deliver exceptional drinks with ease. Order today to enhance your kitchen’s capabilities.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810506228097,"sku":"JB512","price":508.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/f9f613210f85360c434d021fd83c8050.png?v=1781698020"},{"product_id":"1-4l-polycarbonate-container-for-commercial-blenders","title":"1.4L Polycarbonate Container for Commercial Blenders","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Polycarbonate Container is designed for professionals and culinary enthusiasts alike, providing a practical solution for all blending needs. This clear, durable container is not only a replacement option but an essential tool for achieving superior drink profiles, making it ideal for busy kitchens and catering services.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality polycarbonate, this container ensures -lasting performance and meets the demands of high-volume usage. It addresses the common issue of wear and tear in blending containers, offering a reliable option that fits seamlessly with the model. Its clever design includes features that enhance usability, setting it apart in the world of commercial blending solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Polycarbonate\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.4L \/ 48oz\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupplier Model Number\u003c\/strong\u003e 6126-750\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Clear\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRemovable filler cap lets you add ingredients while blending.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePatented Wave-Action System continually forces mixtures down into the blades for a super-creamy drink profile every time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy-read level indicator for precise measurement of contents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStainless steel blades quickly cut through ice for effortless blending.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable polycarbonate material ensures longevity and withstands daily use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLarge 1.4L capacity is perfect for creating multiple servings in one go.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eWave-Action System guarantees smooth and creamy textures every time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eConvenient removable cap allows for easy ingredient addition mid-blend.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eClear design helps monitor blending progress at a glance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStainless steel blades efficiently tackle tough ingredients like ice.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Part\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eQuality Construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurability for -term use in busy environments.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient Blending\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eAchieve -grade results quickly and easily.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to Use\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnhanced functionality with simple ingredient additions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis polycarbonate container excels in various settings, making it a versatile addition to any kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens needing reliable blending solutions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering events where quick service is crucial.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eJuice bars and smoothie shops focused on quality blends.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants looking to streamline drink preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnsure compatibility with the model for seamless integration. For maintenance, clean the container regularly to uphold performance and hygiene. The polycarbonate design allows for easy washing, ensuring that it remains in top condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow durable is the polycarbonate material?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe polycarbonate material is designed to withstand daily use in busy environments, providing a -lasting blending solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use this container for hot liquids?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis container is primarily designed for cold blending applications, and it is advisable to avoid using it for hot liquids to prevent damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this container compatible with other models besides?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis container is specifically designed to fit the model for optimal performance and is not recommended for use with other brands or models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoost your blending capabilities with the Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Polycarbonate Container. Order today to experience the difference in quality and functionality!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810507178369,"sku":"JB508","price":631.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/27de5b222dea0fe470ec10f4932f10de.png?v=1781698040"},{"product_id":"1-4ltr-commercial-blender-container-with-ergonomic-handle","title":"1.4Ltr Commercial Blender Container with Ergonomic Handle","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Co-polyester Container for is a crucial accessory for any commercial kitchen or food service establishment utilizing blenders. Designed for professionals who demand efficiency, this container enhances your blending experience, ensuring consistent results whether you're preparing smoothies, sauces, or soups.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable co-polyester, this container boasts robustness and is BPA-free, making it a safe choice for food handling. The stainless steel blade assembly efficiently tackles tough ingredients like ice and dense fruits, while the -lasting, laser-etched measurements support precise batching for perfect portion control. This spare part not only meets the demands of high-volume blending but also addresses storage challenges with its stackable design.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.4 Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Co polyester\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Clear\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eGenerous 1.4Ltr capacity allows for larger batches at once.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eBPA-free co-polyester construction ensures safety in food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eStrong stainless steel blade designed to easily cut through any food ingredient.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eRemovable filler cap enables mid-blend ingredient additions without mess.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eMess-free spout for easy and controlled pouring.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e -lasting easy-read laser-etched measurements simplify portioning.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic handle offers a comfortable grip for seamless operation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eStackable design frees up valuable counter and storage space.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDurable construction enhances longevity, making it a smart investment.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eMid-blend access with removable filler cap streamlines preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003ePrecision measurements facilitate consistent results and batch control.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic design improves comfort during frequent use.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with series improves versatility in the kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eClear material allows users to monitor contents easily.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eRobust blade assembly\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eCuts through tough ingredients with ease, saving you time and effort.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eBPA-free co-polyester\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eGives peace of mind regarding safety, especially for food-handling applications.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eStackable design\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eEfficiently utilizes space, keeping your kitchen organized and clutter-free.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003e -lasting measurements\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eEnsures accuracy over time, promoting consistency in food quality.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis versatile container is perfect for a range of applications in commercial kitchens and food service environments. Its design makes it suitable for various settings where efficient blending and storage solutions are required.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eBars for blended cocktails and smoothies.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCafés that require consistent beverage preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants for sauces and soups.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks needing quick batch blending on-the-go.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHotels offering breakfast smoothies for guests.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eJuice bars for quick and consistent preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eFor optimal performance, ensure the container is properly fitted with your model. Regular cleaning is recommended to maintain hygiene and performance.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this container dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eYes, the co-polyester material is resistant to dishwasher cleaning, making maintenance easy.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use this container for hot liquids?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis container is designed primarily for cold and room-temperature blending; avoid using it with boiling liquids.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty on this container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe spare container comes with a 1-year warranty for peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your blending experience with the Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Co-polyester Container for. Order today to streamline your kitchen workflow and enjoy consistent blending results.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810507800961,"sku":"JB511","price":484.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/ddf6947fcd3cbbeb05e4da556a71982a.png?v=1781698053"},{"product_id":"1-4ltr-stainless-steel-container-for-commercial-blenders","title":"1.4Ltr Stainless Steel Container For Commercial Blenders","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Stainless Steel Container is an essential accessory designed for professionals seeking reliability in their blending tasks. This genuine spare part is crafted specifically for commercial blenders and provides the ultimate solution for high-volume kitchens and catering businesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable stainless steel, this container ensures longevity and performance under demanding conditions. With a generous capacity of 1.4 liters, it easily manages large batches, allowing you to blend ingredients efficiently without needing to stop and refill frequently. Its design not only accommodates various blends but also sets itself apart with quality that withstands both hot and cold applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.4Ltr \/ 48oz\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupplier Model Number\u003c\/strong\u003e 6126-510S-CE\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStainless steel blade designed for efficient blending.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e118ml \/ 4oz dosing cup simplifies adding liquids for emulsions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLid-open sensor prevents operation when lid is removed for safety.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eErgonomic comfort handle for a secure grip during use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable stainless steel construction provides enhanced durability and heat resistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLarge capacity is ideal for blending sizable batches quickly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLid-open sensor increases user safety by preventing blending without a lid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eComfortable grip handle reduces strain during extended blending tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy-to-clean material ensures efficient maintenance between uses.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDosing cup allows precise liquid measurements for your recipes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e -lasting use, saving you money on frequent replacements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e1.4L capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eBlend large quantities, perfect for busy kitchen environments.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLid-open safety sensor\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces the risk of accidents in the kitchen.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eErgonomic design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eIncreased comfort during operation, especially under heavy use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis stainless steel container excels in various settings and applications, making it a versatile accessory for a range of culinary tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants blending smoothies, sauces, and soups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering companies preparing large volumes of dressings or dips.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens requiring consistent blending across multiple recipes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks needing robust equipment for outdoor cooking.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBanquet facilities serving up large servings for events.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the Spare 1.4Ltr Stainless Steel Container is straightforward and compatible with HBF510S-UK models. To maintain its functionality, regularly inspect the blade for wear and clean the container after each use to avoid residue buildup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty on this product?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe product comes with a 1-year warranty, ensuring peace of mind with your purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this container suitable for both hot and cold liquids?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the stainless steel construction makes it ideal for both hot and cold applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use this container with any blender?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis specific container is designed to fit the HBF510S-UK model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you’re looking for dependable blending capacity and durability, the Commercial Spare 1.4Ltr Stainless Steel Container is the perfect solution. Order today to enhance your blending efficiency!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810508915073,"sku":"JB501","price":1101.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/4ab9e388bfe35c47e18eeab237e748ef.png?v=1781698080"},{"product_id":"1-8l-commercial-co-polyester-container-for-blenders","title":"1.8L Commercial Co-Polyester Container for Blenders","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.8Ltr Co-Polyester Container is an essential addition for those who rely on blenders. Designed for both and home chefs, this 1.8-liter capacity container promises hassle-free blending and mixing, making it easier to create smooth, consistent results.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable BPA-free co-polyester, this container stands up to the rigors of daily use in kitchens. It resolves the issues of leaks and ineffectiveness often faced with outdated blender parts. The ergonomic design and wave-action system make this spare container not only practical but also an integral part of achieving culinary excellence in your kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.8L \/ 64oz\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e BPA-free co-polyester\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Clear\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFits Fury and Tempest blenders seamlessly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eWave-Action system continuously forces mixtures down into the blades for flawless results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable stainless steel blade ensures longevity and efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSealed lid prevents leaks with easy-to-lift tabs for user convenience.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eClear construction allows for easy visibility of contents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eErgonomic handle designed for comfortable pouring and handling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRemovable filler cap simplifies adding ingredients during blending.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStackable design saves valuable storage space.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLaser-etched measurements are durable and easy to read, perfect for precise cooking.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatibility with popular blender models enhances versatility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable BPA-free material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSafe for food use and resists wear over time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eWave-Action system\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures smooth blending for all your recipes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSealed lid\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces mess and prevents spills, keeping your workspace clean.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis 1.8L container is specifically designed for those needing reliability and efficiency in their blending tasks. It's suitable for a variety of settings including:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens where speed and performance are crucial.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services to quickly prepare large batches of smoothies or sauces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens that require durable, high-capacity blending solutions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eJuice bars looking for reliable equipment to serve customers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor optimal performance, ensure that the spare container is properly fitted to compatible models such as and HBH650R-UK. Regularly inspect the seals and lid for wear to maintain leak-proof functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat models is the container compatible with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis container fits the and HBH650R-UK models of blenders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the container dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhile the container is made from durable materials, it is recommended to hand wash for longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty on the container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare container comes with a 1-year warranty for added peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eElevate your blending experience with the Commercial Spare 1.8Ltr Co-Polyester Container. Order today and enjoy the efficiency and reliability this essential spare part brings to your kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810521792897,"sku":"JB507","price":679.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/1376e5bfdb2b2ef75955424236612e68.png?v=1781698319"},{"product_id":"1-8ltr-stainless-steel-container-for-commercial-blenders","title":"1.8Ltr Stainless Steel Container for Commercial Blenders","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.8Ltr Stainless Steel Container is an essential addition for those who depend on commercial blenders for their culinary creations. Perfectly designed for chefs and catering professionals, this spare container allows seamless blending without interruption, ensuring you can keep up with high-demand environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from high-quality stainless steel, this durable container is built to handle both hot and cold applications, allowing versatility in the kitchen. The heavy-duty construction addresses the common problem of wear and tear with frequent use, setting itself apart with its exceptional design that ensures efficient blending and easy maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.8Ltr \/ 64oz\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupplier Model Number\u003c\/strong\u003e 6126-HBF600S\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLarge dosing cup for easy liquid addition while blending.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eComfortable, easy-grip handle enhances user experience.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eJar and blade design optimizes ingredient circulation for well-emulsified results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable stainless steel construction ensures longevity and resistance to frequent use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e1.8Ltr capacity is ideal for blending larger quantities without frequent refills.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEmulsification-friendly design guarantees uniform blending, enhancing the quality of your dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy portability due to the well-designed handle, perfect for busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with commercial blenders, minimizing the need for new appliances.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eOne-year warranty provides peace of mind with your investment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHigh-quality stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurability for consistent use in high-volume environments.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e1.8Ltr capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLess downtime for refills, keeping your operations efficient.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy-grip handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eComfort during use, reducing strain in fast-paced settings.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDesign for optimal emulsification\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eBetter quality blended products, enhancing customer satisfaction.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Commercial Spare 1.8Ltr Stainless Steel Container is ideal for a variety of applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHigh-volume kitchens where efficiency is key.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants looking for reliable spare parts for seamless service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services needing durable and substantial containers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood processing facilities for blending soups, sauces, and smoothies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor optimal performance, ensure compatibility with the HBF600S-UK before use. Regular cleaning after each use will maintain the high quality of the stainless steel and prevent odor retention.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat blenders is this container compatible with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis container is specifically designed to fit commercial blenders, particularly the HBF600S-UK model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the container dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the stainless steel material allows for easy cleaning, including in a dishwasher.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat maintenance does the container require?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegular cleaning and drying after use will help maintain its quality. Avoid using abrasive cleaners to prevent damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your blending experience with the Commercial Spare 1.8Ltr Stainless Steel Container. This essential kitchen companion ensures your blending tasks are quick and efficient, allowing you to focus on what you do best. Order today and elevate your culinary capabilities!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810528444801,"sku":"JB503","price":1231.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/d65f0e3acc17428795eeb16ffa922dca.png?v=1781698403"},{"product_id":"1-9l-commercial-ice-cream-maker-attachment-for-mixers","title":"1.9L Commercial Ice Cream Maker Attachment for Mixers","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ice Cream Maker Attachment is an essential accessory for any home dessert enthusiast. With this attachment, your mixer transforms seamlessly into a powerful frozen treat machine, allowing you to create indulgent ice creams, refreshing slushies, and flavorful sorbets right in your kitchen. Whether you're satisfying a sweet craving or hosting a summer gathering, the Ice Cream Maker makes frozen delights effortlessly accessible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis attachment is constructed with durable plastic, designed to attach easily to your mixer. The 1.9L capacity and innovative features mean you can whip up creamy desserts in no time, solving the problem of store-bought treats that may contain unwanted additives. One standout feature of this model is its redesigned mixing dasher, which ensures even mixing for the perfect texture every time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 178(H) x 280(W)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Plastic\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.7kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.9L\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eThe ice cream bowl requires 16 hours in the freezer before use for optimal results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEffortlessly allows for personalizing frozen treats with fruits, nuts, and candies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eThe mixing dasher is designed to mix ingredients thoroughly, ensuring even freezing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eQuick churn time - prepare ice creams and sorbets in about 30 minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDual walls trap liquid for consistent temperatures throughout the bowl.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile and simple - allows for numerous recipes tailored to your preferences.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact design makes it easy to store when not in use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with a variety of mixers for versatile kitchen use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, allowing for hassle-free dessert creation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eFast churn time\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnjoy homemade ice creams in just 30 minutes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eCustomizable recipes\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eCreate unique flavors that suit your taste preferences.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy attachment\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eTransform your mixer into an ice cream maker without hassle.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eCount on -lasting quality for repeated use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Ice Cream Maker Attachment is perfect for a variety of. Here are some ideal use cases:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFamily gatherings, creating fun, personalized desserts together.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSummer parties to wow guests with handmade, refreshing frozen treats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBirthday celebrations where custom flavors can make the event special.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eWeeknight treats for a fun, indulging way to end a day.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply attach the Ice Cream Maker to your compatible mixer, allowing for easy and user-friendly operation. For best results, ensure the ice cream bowl is thoroughly frozen for at least 16 hours before use, and clean the attachment after each use to maintain optimum performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does it take to make ice cream?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically, it takes about 30 minutes to churn ice cream or sorbets once the bowl is frozen and attached to the mixer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I make other frozen treats?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, this attachment is designed for making ice creams, gelatos, sorbets, and even slushies, giving you versatile options for frozen desserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the maximum capacity of the bowl?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ice Cream Maker has a capacity of 1.9L, allowing you to prepare enough dessert to satisfy your cravings or share with friends and family.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOrder the Ice Cream Maker Attachment today and elevate your dessert game. Enjoy homemade frozen treats made from scratch anytime!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810529264001,"sku":"CX771","price":357.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/6693ae1931e4f2df320f3799bd9cf113.png?v=1781698417"},{"product_id":"1-1-gn-commercial-rib-rack-for-6-20-baby-racks-of-ribs","title":"1\/1 GN Commercial Rib Rack for 6-20 Baby Racks of Ribs","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Rib Rack 1\/1 GN is an essential addition for any kitchen dedicated to serving up succulent ribs. Perfectly designed for chefs and catering professionals, this rib rack can hold between 6 to 20 baby rack ribs, allowing for efficient cooking whether you are preparing for intimate gatherings or large events. With its modular size, it seamlessly fits into the setup, making it a vital tool for your culinary needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed with high-quality stainless steel, the rib rack not only ensures durability but also provides excellent heat conduction for even cooking. Its design addresses the common challenge of achieving uniform caramelization, enhancing the flavor and texture of your ribs. Say goodbye to unevenly cooked meat and embrace a tool that stands out for its performance and reliability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 90(H) x 325(W)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.3kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Years\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eModular 1\/1 GN sizing offers versatility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to cook ribs evenly, ensuring perfect results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHolds up to 20 baby rack ribs for high-capacity cooking.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnsures golden caramelization on both sides for enhanced flavor.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRobust stainless steel construction increases longevity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight design aids in easy handling and repositioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eModular sizing promotes compatibility with various kitchen setups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpecialized rib design optimizes cooking space for bulk preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnhanced caramelization elevates the quality of cooked ribs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eComprehensive 2-year warranty assures peace of mind.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Combination Oven Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEfficient cooking capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePrepare more ribs in one go, reducing cooking time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProvides a -lasting solution that withstands rigorous use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEven cooking results\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDelivers consistently delicious ribs, making you a grill master.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis rib rack excels in various settings, bringing extraordinary results to any occasion where great ribs are a priority. Here are some of the most common applications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants serving BBQ ribs on their menu.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCatering events with high-volume rib requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks focusing on quick service without compromising flavor.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHome kitchens looking to entertain with flavorful rib dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e setups needing efficient bulk cooking options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rib rack is designed for easy integration into your existing setup. For maintenance, clean with mild detergents after use to maintain its shine and performance. Ensure drying thoroughly to prevent water spots.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many ribs can the Rib Rack hold?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rack is designed to hold between 6 to 20 baby rack ribs, making it efficient for large-scale cooking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat material is the rib rack made from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rib rack is constructed from high-quality stainless steel, ensuring durability and excellent heat conduction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty period for this product?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Rib Rack comes with a 2-year warranty, providing reassurance against manufacturing defects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your cooking experience with the Rib Rack 1\/1 GN and enjoy perfectly cooked ribs every time. Order today and elevate your culinary creations!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810534015361,"sku":"AT869","price":331.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/1f25cd9a44eb82453aa89fe4f4da7c6e.png?v=1781698485"},{"product_id":"1-2gn-stainless-steel-commercial-counter-drawer-kit-set-of-2","title":"1\/2GN Stainless Steel Commercial Counter Drawer Kit Set of 2","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Advance Kit Drawers for Counter Units 1\/2 \u0026amp; 1\/2 GN ADV are essential accessories designed for food service professionals seeking enhanced access and organization within their refrigerated counters. These drawers allow you to transform a cabinet-style cooler into a convenient drawer access system, optimizing space and efficiency in your kitchen or catering setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality stainless steel, these drawers provide durability and ease of maintenance. They are engineered to solve common challenges faced in busy kitchens, such as finding space for ingredients and facilitating quick access to frequently used items. With their sleek silver finish, these drawers seamlessly integrate with your existing equipment, ensuring that your workspace remains and tidy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Years Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 15kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eKit to replace 1 door with 2 x 1\/2 drawers - provides enhanced access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eTime-saving easy-clean stainless steel construction - simplifies maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eOptimized drawer system - improves organization and workflow efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable construction - designed to withstand daily use in a busy kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIncreased storage capacity - fit more ingredients and tools without compromising space.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEnhanced accessibility - quickly locate items without rummaging through a cabinet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust stainless steel design - ensuring -lasting durability even in high-demand environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy installation - requires minimal tools for a quick and efficient upgrade.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSeamlessly fits with existing units - no need for additional modifications.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAttractive silver finish - maintains a look in any kitchen setting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces costs by minimizing the need for replacements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to install\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSets up quickly, allowing you to maximize operational efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnhanced organization\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSpeeds up service time by allowing quicker access to ingredients.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e appearance\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMaintains a clean and organized workspace that impresses customers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Advance Kit Drawers are perfect for a variety of settings, streamlining workflows and enhancing kitchen organization. Consider utilizing these drawers in:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants and bistros for ingredient storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering businesses for quick ingredient access during events.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks aiming to optimize limited space.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens where efficiency is critical.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation of the Advance Kit Drawers is straightforward, requiring minimal tools and time. Regular maintenance involves wiping down the stainless steel surface to keep it clean and hygienic, ensuring longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the drawers?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Advance Kit Drawers are specifically designed for 1\/2 GN configurations, fitting seamlessly into compatible units.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs there a warranty?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, these drawers come with a 2-year warranty on parts and labor, providing peace of mind with your purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan these drawers be installed in any refrigerated counter?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey are specifically designed for Advance refrigerated counters, ensuring perfect compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your kitchen's functionality and organization with the Advance Kit Drawers for Counter Units 1\/2 \u0026amp; 1\/2 GN ADV. Order today and experience the difference efficient storage can make! \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810534867329,"sku":"FU019","price":1989.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/88e31ac19ae1279c22c8e6df7abbca76.png?v=1781698498"},{"product_id":"1-3gn-commercial-counter-drawer-kit-for-refrigerated-units","title":"1\/3GN Commercial Counter Drawer Kit for Refrigerated Units","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Advance Kit Drawers for Counter Units 1\/3 \u0026amp; 1\/3 \u0026amp; 1\/3 GN ADV is designed for those who require efficient organization within their refrigerated spaces. Tailored for commercial kitchens, these drawers transform cabinet-style coolers into optimized access points, offering convenience and ergonomic benefits in a high-paced environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMade from durable stainless steel, these drawers are built to withstand the demands of everyday use. The thoughtful design not only enhances your chiller's functionality, but it also helps mitigate clutter. With a user-friendly installation process, this kit stands out by allowing you to seamlessly replace one door with three accessible drawers, thus maximizing your kitchen's storage potential.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Years Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 25kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eKit allows you to replace one door with three 1\/3GN drawers for enhanced accessibility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to install, making it a hassle-free upgrade for efficient storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust construction ensures longevity and reliability under heavy usage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStreamlined organization helps reduce time spent searching for ingredients.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEnhances kitchen workflow by providing drawer access for easier ingredient retrieval.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMakes cleaning and maintenance simpler due to its drawer design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStainless steel material prevents rust and corrosion, ensuring a longer lifespan.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact design allows for maximum usage of limited kitchen space.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEffortlessly integrates with existing Advance counter units.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIncreases operational efficiency which can lead to improved service speed and customer satisfaction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnhanced organization\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLess time wasted searching for ingredients, allowing for smoother kitchen operations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e -lasting use with minimal wear, benefiting your investment over time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to install\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eQuick setup means you can get back to serving customers faster.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Advance Kit Drawers are ideally suited for various culinary and commercial environments. Here are some applications where they excel:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants and cafes with high foot traffic\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services requiring quick access to ingredients\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood prep stations in busy kitchens\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e settings where organization maintains efficiency\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis drawer kit is designed for straightforward installation with compatible Advance refrigerated counters. Regular cleaning with appropriate stainless steel cleaners will ensure the unit remains in optimal condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I install the Advance Kit Drawers?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation instructions are included with the kit, detailing how to replace the existing door with the new drawer setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty on these drawers?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe drawers come with a 2-year warranty that covers both parts and labour, reassuring you of their quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat sizes do the drawers accommodate?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe drawers are designed to fit 1\/3GN (Gastronorm) dimensions, perfect for typical kitchen items and ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTransform your workspace with the Advance Kit Drawers for Counter Units 1\/3 \u0026amp; 1\/3 \u0026amp; 1\/3 GN ADV. Order today and experience the difference in efficiency and organization.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810535391617,"sku":"FU021","price":2750.38,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/ff7291f2627942b9e8ba0926b57bd862.png?v=1781698505"},{"product_id":"1000ml-commercial-refillable-bottle-for-soap-dispenser","title":"1000ml Commercial Refillable Bottle for Soap Dispenser","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Spare LDPE Refillable Bottle 1000ml is an essential addition for any commercial setting, especially for those who use the soap and hand sanitiser dispenser. This refillable bottle allows for convenient and effective access to your liquid sanitiser or soap, improving hygiene in environments where cleanliness is paramount.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable LDPE plastic, this bottle is designed for longevity and repeated use. Its lightweight design, weighing only 60 grams, coupled with easy portability, makes it perfect for high-traffic areas such as restaurants, kitchens, and healthcare facilities. With its straightforward installation and compatibility with the dispenser, it alleviates the hassle of refilling and maintaining hygiene solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 108(H) x 225(W) x 96(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Plastic\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 60g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned to fit 1Ltr soap and hand sanitiser dispenser.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to fit, minimizing downtime in busy environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight and portable for easy handling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eReusable design helps reduce waste and promote sustainability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable LDPE construction ensures -lasting use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile size is perfect for a range of soap and sanitiser types.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for efficient operation, enhancing user experience.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eQuick and easy changeover to reduce disruption in service environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatibility with various dispensers maximizes utility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEco-friendly, supporting a sustainable approach to hygiene products.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eProvides reliability and performance in busy environments.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy installation\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures minimal downtime while refilling.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLightweight design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eFacilitates easy handling and convenience.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Spare LDPE Refillable Bottle excels in numerous settings where hygiene is critical. Its robust design and easy usability make it a favored choice across various industries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants and cafes for soap and sanitiser refills.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHealthcare facilities to ensure cleanliness protocols.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood preparation areas for safe handwashing solutions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSchools and educational institutions for promoting hygiene.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the bottle is quick and hassle-free. Simply remove the old bottle and insert the new LDPE refillable bottle into the dispenser. Regular checks should be made to ensure it is properly fitted for optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat material is the Spare LDPE Refillable Bottle made from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bottle is made from durable LDPE plastic, ensuring longevity and repeated use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 108mm in height, 225mm in width, and 96mm in depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this bottle easy to refill?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the bottle is designed for easy fitting and refilling, minimizing disruption in busy environments.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the Spare LDPE Refillable Bottle 1000ml, maintaining a hygienic workspace has never been easier. Order today to secure a reliable and efficient solution for your hand sanitising needs.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810578481537,"sku":"AJ847","price":4.54,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/44d58f463ab2cdbd65508c0d0fef98ae.png?v=1781698789"},{"product_id":"100mm-commercial-burger-mould-for-adjustable-press","title":"100mm Commercial Burger Mould for Adjustable Press","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Adjustable Burger Press Mould 100mm is an essential accessory designed for food service professionals who demand efficiency and precision in their burger preparation. This mould enables you to consistently create perfectly shaped 100mm burger patties, ensuring a uniform presentation that enhances the overall dining experience.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eMade from high-quality stainless steel, the burger press mould is engineered for durability and ease of use. Its innovative design addresses the common challenges of achieving perfectly shaped burgers during busy kitchen operations. Unlike press moulds, this genuine accessory seamlessly fits into the Multipatty adjustable burger press, allowing for quick changes to meet the demands of a bustling kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1kg\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eA patented self-centring mould couples perfectly with the press buffer.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eStrong construction ensures longevity and reliable performance.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy-clean design saves time during preparation and washing.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for effortless switching during high-volume cooking.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEffortlessly creates uniform burger patties, enhancing your food presentation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eConstructed from easy-to-clean materials, reducing kitchen downtime.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eA patented design promotes consistency with every press.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eQuick-change feature supports seamless transitions during busy hours.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eLightweight build simplifies handling without compromising performance.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with Multipatty press, ensuring a perfect fit and function.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003e -lasting performance and strength, satisfying frequent use.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eEasy to clean\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eSignificantly reduces cleaning time, allowing more focus on cooking.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003ePerfectly shaped patties\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eEnhances burger presentation and uniform cooking for better taste.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eQuick-change capability\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003ePrevents delays in meal preparation, increasing kitchen efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis adjustable burger press mould excels in various kitchen settings, particularly where speed and precision are crucial.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants and diners\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEvent catering services\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eMeal prep services\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe burger press mould is designed for easy installation and removal. Ensure it is properly seated within the Multipatty adjustable burger press for optimal performance. Regular cleaning with mild detergent and water will maintain its pristine condition.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this mould compatible with other burger presses?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eNo, this mould is specifically designed for use with the Multipatty adjustable burger press.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the mould?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe stainless steel construction allows for easy cleaning with warm soapy water or in a dishwasher.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty period for this product?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis mould comes with a 1-year warranty covering parts and labour.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in the Adjustable Burger Press Mould 100mm for consistent quality and efficient burger preparation. Order today to elevate your kitchen’s capabilities!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810581660033,"sku":"FP519","price":854.38,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/6df3776104b2a73bd4063690d473bd81.png?v=1781698864"},{"product_id":"10l-commercial-portable-coffee-urn-for-bulk-brewing","title":"10L Commercial Portable Coffee Urn for Bulk Brewing","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Container 10Ltr is an essential tool for anyone in the catering business, particularly for those utilizing the Bulk Coffee Brewer. This portable coffee urn allows users to brew fresh coffee at one location and seamlessly serve it in another, ensuring that every cup offered retains its rich flavor and aroma. Designed for efficiency, this container offers unparalleled convenience for large-scale events and mass catering needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed with double-walled insulation and electronic heating, the is built to keep coffee at the optimal serving temperature for extended periods. This unique feature solves the common problem of cold coffee during service, setting it apart from traditional urns. With its robust quality and user-friendly design, the is a reliable partner for cafes, restaurants, and catering services that prioritize quality and efficiency in their beverage offerings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 10Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePower\u003c\/strong\u003e 90W. For Coffee Brewers\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 464(H) x 286(W) x 286(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVoltage\u003c\/strong\u003e 230V\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 5kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eElectrical heating with 13 amp plug for reliable performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eInsulated carry handles provide easy transfer from one location to another.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eKeeps coffee hot for hours, preserving optimum aromatic flavors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eNon-drip tap ensures mess-free serving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIncludes a secure lid to protect contents during transport.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDouble-walled insulation maintains temperature for a longer duration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient 90W power ensures quick heating of beverages.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePortable design allows for flexible serving options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust construction allows for frequent use in busy environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design simplifies transport to various service locations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, making it user-friendly for catering staff.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLarge capacity for high-volume service\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePerfect for events, ensuring guests are always served fresh coffee.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eNon-drip tap\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces clean-up and enhances service efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eInsulated handles\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSafe transport of hot beverages without the risk of burns.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eElectronic heating\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eQuick reheating allows for continuous service during busy periods.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Container excels in various settings, from small coffee shops to large catering events. Its versatility makes it a vital addition to your beverage-serving toolkit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCorporate events and conferences\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eWeddings and receptions\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eTrade shows and exhibitions\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSports events and large gatherings\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants serving meals\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is designed for straightforward operation, easily connecting to Coffee Brewers. Regular maintenance is essential; clean the container thoroughly after each use to ensure the longevity of the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the capacity of the container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe container has a capacity of 10 liters, making it ideal for large-scale serving.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use the with other coffee brewers?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis container is specifically designed for use with the Bulk Coffee Brewer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I keep the coffee hot for periods?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt features double-walled insulation and electronic heating which maintains the temperature for optimal flavor retention.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eElevate your coffee serving capabilities with the Container 10Ltr. This essential catering tool is designed for reliability, efficiency, and a superior coffee experience. Order today and experience seamless coffee service!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810585428353,"sku":"DC695","price":995.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/05b2fde3701667cae4d18fe591ed5ec1.png?v=1781699057"},{"product_id":"10ltr-commercial-water-boiler-complete-water-gauge-replacement","title":"10Ltr Commercial Water Boiler Complete Water Gauge Replacement","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 10ltr Water Boiler Complete Water Gauge is an essential part for any kitchen relying on efficient hot water solutions. Designed specifically for the 10-litre water boiler, this gauge ensures precise monitoring of water levels, enhancing usability and convenience for busy catering professionals and home chefs alike.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality glass, the water gauge is designed to withstand the rigors of daily kitchen operations. Its robust build ensures consistent performance, while its genuine design ensures compatibility and reliability. This replacement part solves the common problem of inaccurate water level readings, which can lead to inefficient operations and increased downtime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 257(H) x 16(W) x 16(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Glass\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 200g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFits for easy installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eTransparent design allows for easy water level monitoring at a glance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable construction to withstand high temperatures and frequent use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEssential for maintaining operational efficiency in catering environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAccurate water level readings for effective management.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to install, allowing for minimal downtime.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHigh-quality material ensures longevity in high-use settings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design makes replacement hassle-free.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with specific models for assured fit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSimple design with no complex components reduces maintenance needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Water Boiler Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrecision in monitoring\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures you never run out of hot water during peak times.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEase of installation\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eQuick replacement means minimal disruption to your service.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable glass construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e -lasting performance saves you from frequent replacements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eCompatible with specific models\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eAssured fit with water boilers, enhancing operational efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis water gauge is suitable for various environments where hot water is crucial. Its design makes it perfect for multiple applications, including:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants and cafes where hot beverages are served.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBuffets and catering companies that require constant hot water supply.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood stalls and mobile kitchens utilizing hot water for cooking.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eInstitutional kitchens in schools and hospitals for meal preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation of the water gauge is straightforward and designed for compatibility with specific models. Regular cleaning and maintenance will prolong its lifespan and ensure accurate readings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the material of the water gauge?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe water gauge is made from high-quality glass, ensuring durability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this gauge compatible with all water boilers?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis gauge is specifically designed to fit the model of the water boiler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow can I maintain the water gauge for optimal performance?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegular cleaning and checking for any visible damage will help maintain its functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor precise water monitoring and reliable performance, the 10ltr Water Boiler Complete Water Gauge is an excellent choice. Order today to enhance the efficiency of your kitchen operations.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810589983105,"sku":"AW105","price":29.74,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/e5cc5fb2d02bca8a91fefe2ba8a5a13e.png?v=1781699243"},{"product_id":"10ltr-planetary-mixer-rubber-feet-replacement-set-of-4","title":"10Ltr Planetary Mixer Rubber Feet Replacement Set of 4","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 10Ltr Planetary Mixer Rubber Feet (4 Pack) is an essential component for anyone using the 10Ltr Planetary Mixer, ensuring optimal performance and stability during operation. These replacement rubber feet not only enhance the functionality of your mixer but also provide a secure grip, preventing any unwanted movement while mixing heavy or dense ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable rubber, this product guarantees reliable support while mitigating vibrations during use. The genuine like-for-like replacements solve common wear-and-tear issues associated with mixing equipment, optimizing the efficiency and longevity of your device. With these rubber feet, you're choosing a dependable solution designed to deliver consistent performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 130g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e4 x Rubber Feet – Size\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with 10Ltr Planetary Mixer \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy installation for quick replacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSturdy construction that ensures durability\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned to maintain stability and reduce vibrations\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eNon-slip material for secure placement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEnsures your mixer remains stable during operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMitigates vibrations for quieter, more efficient mixing\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestores mixer reliability with easy replacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust rubber material for -lasting use\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eQuick installation process that saves time\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGenuine replacement parts that guarantee compatibility\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Mixer Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eStability and support\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrevents movement of your mixer, enhancing safety and performance\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy installation\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eNo need for special tools, allowing for quick and simple fitting\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable rubber construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eOffers longevity and resilience against daily wear\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eNoise reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMinimizes disruption in kitchen settings, especially during longer mixing processes\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10Ltr Planetary Mixer Rubber Feet are ideal for a variety of settings where baking and cooking are involved. They excel in environments including:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBakeries\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens for passionate cooks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor installation, simply remove the old feet and replace them with the new rubber feet. Ensure they are securely fastened for optimal performance. Regularly check the feet for wear and replace as needed to maintain stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre these rubber feet compatible with other mixers?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, these rubber feet are specifically designed for the 10Ltr Planetary Mixer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I know if I need to replace the rubber feet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf your mixer vibrates excessively or moves during use, it may be time to replace the rubber feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the weight of the rubber feet set?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the set is 130g.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance the performance and stability of your 10Ltr Planetary Mixer with the genuine Rubber Feet (4 Pack). These replacements are the key to preventing movement and ensuring that your mixing tasks are completed smoothly. Order today to maintain your mixer’s efficiency and effectiveness!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810590048641,"sku":"AH069","price":12.94,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/ea8940cd62a3eaf941b66db33a9b3c1f.png?v=1781699249"},{"product_id":"10mm-commercial-slicer-disc-for-veg-prep-machines","title":"10mm Commercial Slicer Disc for Veg Prep Machines","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 10mm Slicer Disc is an essential component designed specifically for veg prep machines, catering to commercial kitchens and foodservice operations. This slicer disc transforms fruits and vegetables into perfectly uniform slices, significantly enhancing preparation efficiency and quality in high-volume settings.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable aluminium and stainless steel, the 10mm Slicer Disc boasts a robust build quality that withstands daily use in busy kitchens. Its precision engineering minimizes waste and ensures consistent results, solving the problem of uneven cuts that can affect presentation and cooking times. With its sleek silver colour, the slicer disc integrates seamlessly into any kitchen aesthetic.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 35.8(H) x 205(W) x 205(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium \u0026amp; Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 600g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePrecision 10mm slicing capability enhances presentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean design reduces maintenance time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust materials ensure longevity in demanding environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned to fit perfectly into veg prep machines for seamless operation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHigh-quality materials deliver exceptional performance and durability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAccurate slicing allows for better cooking consistency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight yet sturdy, enabling easy handling and installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for easy operation, reducing prep time and labor.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with various ingredients for versatile use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStylish finish that complements kitchen equipment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Veg Prep Machine Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrecision slicing\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eAchieve consistent cuts that enhance dish presentation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e -lasting performance, reducing replacement costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to clean\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLess time on maintenance frees up kitchen staff for other tasks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLightweight design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to handle, allowing faster workflow during busy hours.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10mm Slicer Disc is perfect for a variety of settings where efficiency and quality are paramount. It excels in:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens for quick vegetable prep.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCaterers preparing large quantities of fresh produce.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants aiming for uniform cuts in salads and garnishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks needing reliable kitchen equipment for on-the-go prep.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnsure compatibility with veg prep machines for a perfect fit. Regularly clean the slicer disc to maintain hygiene and performance, and handle with care to prolong its lifespan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat materials is the 10mm Slicer Disc made from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe slicer disc is constructed from durable aluminium and stainless steel for longevity and performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the slicer disc?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe disc features an easy-to-clean design, making it suitable for quick maintenance after use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the slicer disc compatible with other machines?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis slicer disc is specifically designed for veg prep machines to ensure optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your kitchen’s efficiency with the 10mm Slicer Disc. Order today and experience the difference in your food preparation workflow!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810590114177,"sku":"AN811","price":106.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/83b36805078364b46125f59a08e68c9a.png?v=1781699256"},{"product_id":"10mm-grater-disc-for-commercial-veg-prep-machine-parts","title":"10mm Grater Disc for Commercial Veg Prep Machine Parts","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 10mm Grater Disc is an essential addition for any food service operation equipped with a Veg Prep Machine. Designed for those who prioritize efficiency in food preparation, this grater disc simplifies the process of grating vegetables, offering an effortless solution to time-consuming tasks. With its precise 10mm grater disc, you can achieve consistent results and enhance the texture of your dishes, improving both presentation and taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBuilt with high-quality materials, the 10mm Grater Disc features a durable combination of polyamide and stainless steel. This construction not only ensures longevity but also delivers robustness against regular use. The grater disc solves the challenge of uneven grating and minimizes waste, allowing you to maximize your produce while saving time and effort in the kitchen. With easy maintenance and a design that fits seamlessly into the Veg Prep Machine, it stands out as a reliable choice for professionals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 35.8(H) x 205(W) x 205(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Polyamide \u0026amp; Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 320g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient 10mm grating size suitable for various vegetables.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned specifically for compatibility with Veg Prep Machines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight construction for easy handling and installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable design that withstands regular use in busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePromotes uniform grating, which enhances the texture of dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, significantly reducing prep time and effort.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurability ensures -term usage, making it cost-effective.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile application across various types of vegetables.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design facilitates quick changes and installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with existing Veg Prep Machines, ensuring hassle-free use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Veg Prep Machine Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures -lasting performance, reducing replacement costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient grating\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSaves time during food prep, boosting kitchen productivity.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy maintenance\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMakes cleaning quick and straightforward, keeping your kitchen organized.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10mm Grater Disc excels in various culinary settings, making it an indispensable tool for any kitchen where efficiency and quality are paramount.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants where time efficiency is critical for service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering businesses needing consistent vegetable preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks requiring reliable equipment for quick meal assembly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHospital kitchens that prioritize food presentation and safety.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBakeries where fresh, finely grated ingredients enhance products.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor optimal performance, ensure the grater disc is properly aligned and securely fastened to the Veg Prep Machine. Regular cleaning after use will maintain its effectiveness and longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the dimension of the 10mm Grater Disc?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 35.8(H) x 205(W) x 205(D)mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat materials are used in the construction?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe grater disc is made from a combination of polyamide and stainless steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow heavy is the grater disc?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the 10mm Grater Disc is 320g.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExperience the efficiency and reliability of the 10mm Grater Disc. Shop now and elevate your food preparation process today!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810590179713,"sku":"AN804","price":104.38,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/e6efb0a0343fa91558d7225c01f1673e.png?v=1781699262"},{"product_id":"10mm-slicing-disc-for-commercial-veg-prep-machine","title":"10mm Slicing Disc for Commercial Veg Prep Machine","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 10mm Slicing Disc is an essential accessory designed for the multi-function continuous vegetable prep machine, tailored for chefs, restaurateurs, and culinary enthusiasts who demand efficiency in their food preparation processes. This slicing disc enables quick and uniform slicing of vegetables, ensuring consistent presentation and texture in your dishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted with durability in mind, this disc is made from high-quality materials that withstand the rigors of kitchens. The 10mm Slicing Disc addresses the common challenges of manual slicing, saving you time and promoting safety. Its precise cutting capability ensures that every slice is perfect, giving your culinary creations a edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 630g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e10mm slicing capability for uniform vegetable presentation\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to install and replace when needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with multi-function continuous vegetable prep machines\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStreamlined design for efficient food prep\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eConsistent slicing ensures uniform cooking and appealing visuals in dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable construction means -lasting performance in demanding kitchen environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eQuick installation saves time, allowing you to focus on preparing meals rather than setup.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design simplifies handling and reduces strain during use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with various vegetables, maximizing versatility in menu options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e1-year warranty provides peace of mind on your purchase.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Veg Prep Machine Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrecision slicing\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnhances the presentation and uniformity of your dishes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eQuality materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures reliability and durability in a busy kitchen.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy maintenance\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eFitting and replacement are straightforward, minimizing downtime.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10mm Slicing Disc is particularly effective in a variety of settings and industries. It shines in environments where efficiency and quality are paramount.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants that prepare large quantities of salads or vegetable dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering companies needing consistent slicing for buffets and events.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGrocery stores or delis looking for an efficient solution for vegetable preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks and pop-up kitchens that require quick and reliable food prep tools.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFitting the 10mm Slicing Disc onto the compatible vegetable prep machine is simple. Ensure that the machine is properly powered down before removal or installation. Regular maintenance includes cleaning the disc after use to maintain performance and hygiene.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat type of vegetables can be sliced with this disc?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis slicing disc is versatile and can cut through a variety of vegetables, providing consistent thickness for all types of dishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the slicing disc?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe disc should be washed with warm soapy water after each use to prevent food residue build-up and ensure hygiene.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this disc compatible with other brands?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10mm Slicing Disc is specifically designed to fit multi-function continuous vegetable prep machines and may not be compatible with other brands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in the 10mm Slicing Disc for your kitchen today and streamline your vegetable preparation tasks while enhancing the quality of your culinary creations. Order now to elevate your cooking efficiency!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810590278017,"sku":"AA083","price":227.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/17f960919a7900f832f201238453e10c.png?v=1781699269"},{"product_id":"10x10mm-commercial-cutting-grid-for-cube-food-preparation","title":"10x10mm Commercial Cutting Grid for Cube Food Preparation","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 10x10mm Cutting Grid for Cubes is an essential replacement part designed for commercial kitchens that rely on the and models. It serves food service businesses looking for reliable and efficient cutting solutions, enabling the seamless production of uniformly sized food cubes that enhance presentation and cooking efficiency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis cutting grid is constructed from durable materials that withstand heavy use in busy kitchens. It addresses the common challenge of inconsistent food sizes by providing precise 10x10mm cube cuts. Unlike lower-quality alternatives, this cutting grid is designed specifically for machines, ensuring compatibility and optimised performance that keeps your operations running smoothly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 850g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e1 x Cutting Grid – 10 x 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with and models\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable construction for -lasting use\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean and maintain for efficient kitchen workflow\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSaves time by producing uniform cuts quickly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for precision cutting, providing uniform 10x10mm cubes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust construction ensures durability in high-demand environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with well-known models for seamless integration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design for easy handling and installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMaintenance-free features allow you to focus more on food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for easy cleaning to support hygiene standards in food service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrecision Cutting\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eAchieve consistent food presentation, improving customer appeal.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable Materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnjoy a longer lifespan, reducing the need for frequent replacements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy Maintenance\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSpend less time on upkeep and more time on food preparation tasks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis cutting grid is ideal for various settings, ensuring efficiency and consistency across a range of culinary applications. It excels in:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants for preparing vegetables and fruits\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services requiring bulk food preparation\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood production facilities focusing on uniformity in food sizes\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBuffets needing aesthetically pleasing food displays\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo install, simply replace your existing cutting grid in the compatible machines. Regular cleaning with warm soapy water is recommended to maintain hygiene and performance. Ensure the grid is dried properly to prevent any residual moisture affecting food quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat machines is this cutting grid compatible with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis cutting grid is compatible with the and models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I clean the cutting grid?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is recommended to wash the grid with warm soapy water and dry it thoroughly after each use for optimal hygiene.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat size food cubes does this grid produce?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe grid cuts food into precise 10x10mm cubes, perfect for various culinary applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your kitchen efficiency with the 10x10mm Cutting Grid for Cubes. Order today to ensure your food preparation processes are quick, consistent, and.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810590638465,"sku":"AD708","price":208.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/70ca1f9d21114b9a74980314ebae2dff.png?v=1781699316"},{"product_id":"10x10mm-french-fries-disc-for-commercial-veg-prep-machine","title":"10x10mm French Fries Disc for Commercial Veg Prep Machine","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 10x10mm French Fries Disc is an essential component designed specifically for the multi-function continuous veg prep machine. This product is aimed at commercial kitchens or busy restaurants that need to maintain efficiency and consistency when preparing perfectly shaped French fries. The biggest benefit of this slicing disc is its ability to create uniform 10mm fries that ensure even cooking and appealing presentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed with high-quality materials, this French fries disc is designed for durability and performance. It solves the common dilemma of inconsistent fry sizes and helps streamline food preparation processes. With a precise cutting capability, the 10x10mm French Fries Disc utilizes reliable engineering, setting it apart from generic slicers that may not deliver the same accuracy or longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 700g\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFor use with 10mm Slicing Disc \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for efficiency and speed in food preparation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCrafted from durable materials that withstand high usage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with the multi-function veg prep machine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnsures precise cutting for consistent fry sizes every time\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy to install and operate for quick assembly in any kitchen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEfficient slicing designed to save time during prep\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDurable construction minimizes the need for frequent replacements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConsistent fry size enhances customer satisfaction\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility with other machine parts ensures versatility\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight design aids in easy handling and operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReputable brand history provides peace of mind in quality\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Veg Prep Machine Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConsistent fry sizing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnsures even cooking and enhances food presentation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurable materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced need for replacements, saving time and costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne-year warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProvides assurance and reliability for your investment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEasy compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSimplifies integration into your existing kitchen setup.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMakes handling and operation straightforward, even in busy kitchens.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10x10mm French Fries Disc excels in a variety of commercial kitchen settings. Its design caters to anyone looking to elevate their food preparation efficiency without sacrificing quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants aiming to produce high volumes of fries quickly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCatering companies needing uniformity for large events\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFast food outlets where speed is essential\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks requiring portable solutions for quick service\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e establishments wanting consistency in offerings\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAny kitchen focused on enhancing productivity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the 10x10mm French Fries Disc is straightforward and designed for easy compatibility with existing machines. Regular maintenance involves cleaning the disc after use to ensure its longevity and effectiveness in food preparation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat machines is the French fries disc compatible with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe French fries disc is designed for use with the multi-function continuous veg prep machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty period for this product?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe disc comes with a one-year warranty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the weight of the 10x10mm French Fries Disc?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe disc weighs 700g, making it lightweight yet robust for kitchen use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10x10mm French Fries Disc presents a versatile solution for any kitchen seeking to optimize their fry preparation. Don't miss out on this useful kitchen accessory; order today to enhance your culinary efficiency!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810590867841,"sku":"AA087","price":170.38,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/a64891a68fdd6173c3ab3d4d95afe831.png?v=1781699323"},{"product_id":"1200mm-commercial-open-stand-for-countertop-appliances","title":"1200mm Commercial Open Stand for Countertop Appliances","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 900 Series 1200mm Open Stand MB-915 is an essential piece for any kitchen, particularly suitable for those using 900 Series countertop appliances. Designed for chefs and kitchen staff, this open stand offers an ergonomic solution that elevates your cooking units while providing the additional open storage space that enhances kitchen efficiency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from strong stainless steel, the MB-915 ensures a solid and reliable base for your appliances. Its robust build quality makes it easy to clean and maintain, solving the problem of inadequate kitchen workspace and helping keep your operating area organized. Part of the 900 Series, this stand is compatible with other units in the range, adding versatility to your kitchen setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 600(H) x 1200(W)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Years\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 38kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStrong 2mm thick stainless steel construction for durability\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy connection to support 900 series countertop equipment\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCan be used for open storage, maximizing kitchen space\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with models,, and \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust design providing stability for heavy countertop equipment\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eErgonomically placed height to reduce strain during use\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRust-resistant finish ensuring -lasting performance\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eOpen storage allows for easy access to cooking tools and ingredients\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned specifically for 900 Series for seamless integration\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSimple maintenance due to smooth stainless steel surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSturdy stainless steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReliable base for all your countertop appliances\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eErgonomic height\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eImproves workflow efficiency and comfort while cooking\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eOpen storage design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnhances organization, making it easier to access tools while working\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 900 Series 1200mm Open Stand MB-915 excels in various kitchen settings and offers a multitude of uses:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants and cafes for fast-paced cooking environments\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering businesses needing additional storage options\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBakery setups where equipment needs secure, elevated placement\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks or mobile kitchens requiring compact, efficient setups\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEducational institutions like culinary schools for practical training\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFitting the 900 Series Open Stand is straightforward. Simply connect it to your countertop appliances to create a supported cooking area. For maintenance, wipe down the stainless steel surface with a damp cloth to keep it clean and shiny.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the weight capacity of the MB-915 stand?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stand is designed to hold countertop appliances securely, but the exact weight capacity may depend on the specific equipment being used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the stand easy to assemble?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the design allows for easy assembly with straightforward instructions, making setup quick and hassle-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat warranty does the product come with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 900 Series Open Stand MB-915 comes with a 2-year warranty, ensuring quality and peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in the 900 Series 1200mm Open Stand MB-915 to enhance your kitchen's functionality and efficiency. Order today to elevate your cooking experience!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810616721793,"sku":"HY825","price":2342.38,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/afd7c724f737a863ecaa954a8652f5e5.png?v=1781699591"},{"product_id":"1200w-commercial-bains-marie-replacement-heating-element","title":"1200W Commercial Bains Marie Replacement Heating Element","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Heating Element 1200W is an essential component designed for anyone relying on Bain Marie units in commercial settings. This high-performance replacement part ensures your food stays at the desired temperature, making it ideal for catering services, restaurants, and banqueting operations. With this heating element, you can maintain efficiency, serving delicious, hot food to your customers consistently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from durable stainless steel, this heating element is built to withstand the rigors of a busy kitchen environment. Its robust construction not only enhances longevity but also solves common heating issues associated with food warmer units. By choosing a genuine spare part, you can ensure compatibility and reliability, setting yourself apart from those who might opt for cheaper, unreliable alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 25(H) x 400(W) x 190(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 310g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGenuine spare part for guaranteed compatibility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient 1200W power output, ensuring rapid heating.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy installation process that minimizes downtime.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCorrosion-resistant finish, contributing to -lasting performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHigh heating efficiency to keep food at optimal temperatures for longer periods.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with various Bain Marie models, enhancing versatility in replacement options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design allows for easy handling and installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust material ensures an extended lifespan, reducing the frequency of replacements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAttractive silver color blends seamlessly with kitchen appliances.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSafety features incorporated to prevent overheating and damage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Bains Marie Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eGenuine spare part\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures perfect fit and functionality in your Bain Marie.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eStainless steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eResists rust and corrosion, ensuring durability in a fast-paced kitchen.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient heating\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eRapidly brings food to serving temperature, improving service speed.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Heating Element excels in various commercial and kitchen environments. It is particularly effective in the following settings:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services where food needs to be held at specific temperatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants employing Bain Marie units for buffets or meal preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBanquet halls managing large-scale food service for events.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks and street food vendors in need of portable heating solutions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the Heating Element is straightforward and designed to minimize downtime. Ensure compatibility by matching it with the correct Bain Marie model. Routine inspections are recommended to maintain optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat models is this heating element compatible with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis heating element is compatible with models,,,,, and.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the power output of the heating element?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe power output is 1200W, providing efficient heating capabilities for your food warmer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat material is the heating element made of?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe heating element is constructed from stainless steel, ensuring durability and corrosion resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, the Heating Element 1200W is a reliable solution for restaurateurs and caterers seeking efficient heating in their Bain Marie setups. Order today to ensure your meals are served at the perfect temperature, every time.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810616820097,"sku":"AL198","price":46.54,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/4745cc8835e932605ada04d6012ccfa6.png?v=1781699604"},{"product_id":"12l-commercial-external-water-softener-for-warewashing-systems","title":"12L Commercial External Water Softener for Warewashing Systems","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 12Ltr Base Exchange External Water Softener is an essential tool for operators of commercial dishwashing equipment. Designed specifically for those in hard water areas, this water softener helps to significantly reduce limescale buildup. This means improved washing effectiveness, longer-lasting equipment, and peace of mind for businesses that rely on impeccable dishware presentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable stainless steel, the water softener is built to withstand the demands of a busy kitchen environment. This reliable device expertly filters hard water, preventing costly damage to warewashers and ensuring that your dishes come out spotless every time. Unlike electric models, the softener operates without an electricity supply, ensuring that you can set it and forget it without added costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 520(H) x 180(W)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 15kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum delivery\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 litres per hour\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTypical softening capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 1800 Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eUses granulated dishwasher salt which is economical and efficient.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRequires no electricity supply, making it both eco-friendly and cost-effective.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eReduces limescale buildup, ensuring cleaner and clearer results for your dishware.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with several popular models, improving versatility across different setups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCleans effectively in cold water (up to 35°C), saving costs on heating.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRequires minimal maintenance, allowing for hassle-free operation in any business environment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact size is perfect for smaller undercounter warewashers without sacrificing performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEnhances the operational lifespan of your equipment, protecting your investment over time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Warewashing Chemicals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEffective limescale reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eImproved cleaning results and prolonged equipment life.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eNo electricity required\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLower operational costs and ease of installation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDesigned for hard water\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReliable performance in challenging water conditions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is ideal for a variety of environments where clean dishware is paramount. Its versatility makes it suitable for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants with high dishwashing demands\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCafes that serve beverages and meals\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHotels ensuring guest satisfaction with clean utensils\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAny commercial kitchens in hard water regions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation of the water softener is straightforward, requiring no specialist tools or expertise. Regular checks to confirm salt levels will ensure optimal performance and longevity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat type of salt is required for the water softener?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe water softener uses granulated dishwasher salt, which is specifically formulated to optimize its performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does this softener help with equipment warranties?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing a water softener like the water softener helps prevent limescale damage, which can otherwise lead to equipment malfunction and potential warranty issues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the expected lifespan of the water softener?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe typical softening capacity of 1800 liters ensures users enjoy an extended operational period under normal working conditions before needing replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 12Ltr Base Exchange External Water Softener is your key to maintaining clean and hygienic dishware in hard water areas. Protect your equipment and enhance your washing results effectively—order today!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810618425729,"sku":"FB151","price":873.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/1e41aeb5b8de351482cd275c060aef8e.png?v=1781699711"},{"product_id":"130cm-commercial-oven-peel-for-artisan-baking-tools","title":"130cm Commercial Oven Peel for Artisan Baking Tools","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Mono Artisan Mini Deck Oven Peel 130cm is an essential tool for micro and artisan bakers, designed specifically for loading dough and unloading freshly baked bread from the oven's sole plate. This genuine Mono accessory enhances the baking experience, making it safe and efficient to handle hot baked goods straight from the oven.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted with quality build materials, the Mono oven peel stands out due to its thoughtful design. This product not only helps bakers avoid burns while removing hot bread but also offers convenient storage solutions since it can be mounted on either side of the oven. Its functionality meets the demands of busy kitchens, ensuring a smoother workflow for both and home bakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 100(H) x 500(W) x 1300(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Brown\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned to easily remove hot bread from the baking chamber, ensuring safety and efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSpace-saving design allows for easy storage by mounting the peel on either side of the oven.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eConstructed as a genuine accessory, ensuring compatibility with the Mono oven.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eA vital tool for both novice and experienced bakers in a variety of settings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePlease note: made to order, non-cancellable and non-returnable once purchased.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e reach of 130cm helps navigate deep ovens without risk of injury.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight construction reduces strain, making it easy for bakers to handle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable brown finish complements kitchen aesthetics and hides wear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEnhances workflow by allowing quick transitions from oven to serving area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for quality, suitable for both home and commercial kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eThis accessory ensures that your baked creations are presented perfectly, enhancing their visual appeal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Mono Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy bread removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eNo risk of burns while handling hot items, improving safety.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSpace-efficient storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMaximizes kitchen space, keeping your workspace organized.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eQuality construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eInvesting in a reliable tool that will last through countless baking sessions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Mono Artisan Mini Deck Oven Peel is your trusted partner in various baking scenarios. It excels in any setting requiring high-volume baking or precise handling of artisan bread.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eArtisan bakeries\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome baking enthusiasts\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePizzerias for easy placing and removing pizzas\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis oven peel is designed to be easily mounted on either side of your oven, ensuring quick access when needed. Cleaning is simple; a soft cloth and warm, soapy water are recommended to maintain its appearance and functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I cancel my order after placing it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, this product is made to order and cannot be cancelled or returned once the order has been placed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the oven peel suitable for all oven types?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is designed to complement the Mono ovens but may be used with various other ovens as well, ensuring versatility in usage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the best way to clean the oven peel?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor maintenance, just wipe it with a warm, soapy cloth to keep it in excellent condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your baking arsenal with the Mono Artisan Mini Deck Oven Peel 130cm today. This essential tool enhances safety and efficiency in your baking routine. Order now to elevate your baking experience!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810623046017,"sku":"AT284","price":141.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/6ad9b9519240490769b3b42cf194b992.png?v=1781699947"},{"product_id":"130mm-commercial-adjustable-burger-press-mould-for-food-prep","title":"130mm Commercial Adjustable Burger Press Mould for Food Prep","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Adjustable Burger Press Mould 130mm is an essential tool for chefs and food enthusiasts looking to create perfectly shaped burgers with ease. Designed specifically for use with the Multipatty adjustable burger press, this mould ensures consistent and results every time, making it ideal for busy kitchens and catering events.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from strong stainless steel, the burger mould is not only durable but also easy to clean. Its well-thought-out design minimizes the risk of mess during food preparation. The quick-change feature allows for seamless transitions between different sizes, ensuring you can keep up with demand without any hassle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.05kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for use with Multipatty adjustable burger press for efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePatented self-centring moulds couple with the press buffer perfectly for consistency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStrong, easy-clean stainless steel construction for quick maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to change, allowing for adaptability during busy meal prep times.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCrafted from durable stainless steel to withstand rigorous use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSelf-centring design ensures that every burger is the same size, enhancing presentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight at 1.05kg for ease of handling in any kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e1-year warranty provides peace of mind and assurance in your purchase.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEffortless cleaning process saves time and maintains hygiene standards.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSeamless compatibility with the Multipatty press streamlines operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable Construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eThe mould withstands heavy usage and lasts longer, minimizing replacements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eConsistent Shapes\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eYour burgers will look, enhancing customer satisfaction.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eQuick Changeover\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSwitch between sizes with ease, keeping service fast during peak hours.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis burger mould excels in various settings, making it a versatile choice for culinary professionals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants looking to serve consistently portioned burgers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering companies producing large volumes of uniform burgers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks with curb appeal through eye-catching presentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens where precision in cooking is desired.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis mould easily attaches to the Multipatty adjustable burger press. Regular cleaning with warm, soapy water is recommended to maintain its quality and hygiene.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the material of the burger press mould?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mould is made from durable stainless steel, ensuring strength and easy cleaning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use this mould with any burger press?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis mould is specifically designed to fit the Multipatty adjustable burger press.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty period for this product?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Adjustable Burger Press Mould comes with a 1-year warranty covering parts and labor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExperience the utmost precision in burger preparation with the Adjustable Burger Press Mould 130mm. Elevate your kitchen efficiency and maintain excellent presentation standards. Order today! \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810623144321,"sku":"FP520","price":940.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/87d6817a62622d3e2b19f30fe076e374.png?v=1781699960"},{"product_id":"14ltr-commercial-immersion-grid-for-sous-vide-cooking","title":"14Ltr Commercial Immersion Grid for Sous Vide Cooking","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Immersion Grid for 14Ltr Chamber is an essential tool for any cooking enthusiast or chef dedicated to sous vide cooking. This high-quality immersion grid ensures that your pouches remain fully submerged, allowing for precise temperature control which is critical for perfect cooking results. No longer will you need to worry about floating bags or uneven cooking, as this grid promises consistent outcomes every time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable stainless steel, the Immersion Grid is designed to withstand the rigors of a busy kitchen. It provides a robust framework that actively maintains the pouches in the desired position within the water bath. This innovative solution effectively addresses the common challenge of floating food parcels, setting it apart from conventional cooking methods. With its reliable construction and thoughtful design, this immersion grid is ideal for anyone serious about their culinary pursuits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 40(H) x 325(W) x 300(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupplier Model Number\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Years Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMaintains consistent cooking temperatures by keeping pouches submerged at all times.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for easy removal and insertion during service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable and easy to clean for labor-efficient food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBritish made, ensuring high standards of manufacturing quality.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHeavy-duty construction prevents wear over time, ensuring longevity in the kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFits seamlessly into the Food Range FL14D 14 litre water bath for optimal compatibility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight and easy to handle, which simplifies the cooking process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eThe grid eliminates the need for manual weights or additional devices to submerge pouches.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile design suitable for various cooking settings, from home kitchens to environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMaintains food hygiene and safety standards by ensuring packages are fully submerged.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eConsistent cooking results\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnjoy perfectly cooked meals with every use, achieving reliable temperature control.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduce replacement costs and maintain high cooking standards over time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to remove and install\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eStreamline your cooking workflow in busy kitchen environments for added efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e2-year warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eConfidence in your purchase, knowing you're supported in case of any issues.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Immersion Grid excels in numerous environments where sous vide cooking is practiced. Here are some ideal applications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e kitchens for high-volume cooking.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants and bistros that prioritize precision in food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services that require consistent cooking standards across multiple dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens of culinary enthusiasts looking to enhance their cooking techniques.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood labs for testing and developing new recipes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Immersion Grid is designed to clip easily inside the top edge of the Food Range FL14D water bath, allowing for quick and straightforward installation. Regular cleaning with kitchen detergents will ensure it remains in premium condition for -lasting use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan the immersion grid be used with other brands of water baths?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Immersion Grid is specifically designed for use with the Food Range FL14D 14 litre water bath for optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the immersion grid dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhile it is made from stainless steel and easy to clean, it is recommended to wash it by hand to maintain its quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the warranty period for this product?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe immersion grid comes with a 2-year warranty covering both parts and labour, ensuring peace of mind with your purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnsure perfection in your sous vide cooking with the Immersion Grid for 14Ltr Chamber. Order today to elevate your culinary experience!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810649915777,"sku":"HC587","price":139.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/5436ebebd6b6e54b1cb1d1d0301feea1.png?v=1781700208"},{"product_id":"14mm-commercial-slicer-disc-for-veg-prep-machine-parts","title":"14mm Commercial Slicer Disc for Veg Prep Machine Parts","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 14mm Slicer Disc is a precision component designed for Veg Prep Machines, ideal for chefs and food service providers who require consistent and efficient slicing. This high-quality disc provides the ideal slice thickness, making food preparation faster and more uniform, which ultimately enhances productivity in busy kitchens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable aluminium and stainless steel, this slicer disc is engineered to withstand regular daily use. It resolves common issues related to uneven slicing and build quality, ensuring reliable performance with every use. The robust materials not only increase longevity but also make it easier to clean, providing a practical solution for food service operations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 35.8(H) x 205(W) x 205(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium \u0026amp; Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 460g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to install and replace, contributing to minimal downtime in operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePrecision engineering for uniform slicing, enhancing food presentation and cooking consistency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design allows for effortless handling without compromising durability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with a range of food types, making it versatile for different preparation tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRobust construction ensures -lasting performance in high-volume kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStandardized slicing thickness for efficient food preparation and portion control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCorrosion-resistant materials provide longevity and maintain hygiene standards.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight structure reduces user fatigue during extended use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSimple installation process enhances operational efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned specifically for kitchen environments, ensuring reliability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Veg Prep Machine Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduced replacement costs and increased reliability over time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eConsistent slicing\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eImproved presentation and portioning for better customer satisfaction.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to clean\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSaves time on maintenance and helps maintain high hygiene standards.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLightweight design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eGreater ease of use for staff, leading to improved work efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis 14mm Slicer Disc excels in various commercial settings where food preparation is essential. Its design allows it to be used in various industries, including:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDelis and butcher shops\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eInstitutional kitchens\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood processing industries\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the 14mm Slicer Disc is straightforward and can be accomplished with minimal tools. Regular maintenance consists of cleaning after each use to prevent residue build-up, allowing for optimal performance and hygiene.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this slicer disc compatible with all Veg Prep Machines?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the 14mm Slicer Disc is designed to fit all compatible Veg Prep Machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan this disc handle hard vegetables?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAbsolutely, the design allows for slicing through various types of vegetables, including harder varieties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat size does the disc slice to?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe slicer disc provides a 14mm slice thickness, making it ideal for consistent cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRevolutionize your food preparation with the durable and efficient 14mm Slicer Disc. Order today and enhance your kitchen's productivity.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810649981313,"sku":"AN812","price":106.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/7ed97553aaaab56bc27a95d876e0a5b5.png?v=1781700215"},{"product_id":"14x14mm-replacement-cutting-blades-for-commercial-potato-chipper","title":"14x14mm Replacement Cutting Blades for Commercial Potato Chipper","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 14 x 14mm Blades are essential replacement parts specifically designed for the potato chipper. Ideal for both food service professionals and home cooks, these blades ensure a consistent and efficient slicing experience, crucial for preparing perfectly cut potato chips. With these blades, you can maintain the quality and appeal of your fried dishes while saving time and effort in the kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable materials, the Blades are guaranteed to provide -lasting performance in your culinary endeavours. They help solve the problem of dull or inefficient cutting blades, which can compromise the quality of your chips. What sets these replacement blades apart is their compatibility with multiple models, making it easy to find the right fit for your equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 14 x 14mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 40g\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/strong\u003e Compatible with LPCH and \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Heavy-duty stainless steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack Size\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 set of blades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for smooth and efficient slicing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHelps maintain quality and uniformity in food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy to replace, minimizing downtime in busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHigh-quality stainless steel guarantees durability and longevity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact design fits a variety of potato chipper models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConsistent cutting results lead to appealing presentations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReplacement process is quick, ensuring minimal disruption in food service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight design makes installation easy without cumbersome handling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAllows for efficient production of chips, saving time and in busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Potato Rumbler Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurable construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduces the need for frequent replacements, saving costs over time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible with multiple models\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOffers flexibility and convenience in various kitchen setups.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEasy installation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAllows for quick changes, keeping kitchen operations running smoothly.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 14 x 14mm Blades are versatile tools ideal for a variety of settings. Their functionality and ease of use make them suitable for numerous applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens for high-volume potato preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants that require consistent chip portions for presentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCatering services for events that focus on quality food.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks specializing in fresh fried items.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHome kitchens for avid cooks looking for precision in slicing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSnack shops focused on quick and efficient food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation of the 14 x 14mm Blades is straightforward, ensuring compatibility with the LPCH and models. Regularly check for sharpness and replace as needed to maintain optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat materials are the blades made from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe blades are made from heavy-duty stainless steel, providing durability and resistance to corrosion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I know if these blades are compatible with my chipper?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese blades are specifically designed for use with models LPCH and. Check your model number for compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the weight of the blade set?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe entire set of blades weighs approximately 40g, making it lightweight and easy to handle.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your kitchen tools with the 14 x 14mm Blades to ensure that your food preparation remains efficient and high-quality. Order today to experience the difference!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810650112385,"sku":"FU345","price":259.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/57b9d2f756f2e0119afd0e5183b0fb38.png?v=1781700229"},{"product_id":"15-slot-disc-holder-for-commercial-food-processor-attachment","title":"15 Slot Disc Holder for Commercial Food Processor Attachment","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 15 Slot Disc Holder is an essential component designed for efficient food preparation. This item is perfect for kitchens and catering services, ensuring that your veg prep attachment and discs are stored securely and organized. The 15-slot design maximizes your workspace, allowing for quick access to the discs you need for slicing, grating, and more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable polyethylene, the 15 Slot Disc Holder is built to withstand the rigors of a busy kitchen. This replacement part not only solves storage issues but also protects your blades and discs from damage. The innovative design differentiates it from other holders, providing a reliable solution that meets the demands of culinary professionals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 80(H) x 210(W) x 280(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Polyethylene\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 630g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e15-slot design keeps your discs organized and accessible.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with veg prep attachments for seamless integration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight construction allows for easy handling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable material ensures -lasting performance and reliability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient organization - streamline your workflow with easy access to food processor discs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEnhanced durability - the polyethylene build offers -lasting resistance to daily wear and tear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSpace-saving design - maximize kitchen space by storing multiple discs in one holder.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eReliable compatibility - designed specifically for products, ensuring a perfect fit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e quality - crafted for demanding commercial environments where efficiency counts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean and maintain - materials allow for quick and hassle-free cleaning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Food Processor Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSecure storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eProtects your discs from damage and loss.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSaves time during food prep by keeping within reach.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHigh-quality material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eProvides peace of mind through durability and reliability.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLightweight\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to transport within the kitchen or around different workstations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 15 Slot Disc Holder excels in a variety of settings where culinary precision is vital. It is ideally suited for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e kitchens in restaurants and catering companies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood prep areas requiring efficient organization.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering services where mobility and storage are key.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCooking classes and culinary schools that utilize food processor attachments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply place the discs into the slots of the holder for easy access. Ensure to clean the polyethylene regularly to maintain hygiene and prolong the life of the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhat is the weight of the 15 Slot Disc Holder?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe holder weighs 630g, making it lightweight for easy handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIs this product compatible with all veg prep attachments?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is designed specifically to be compatible with veg prep attachments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the holder?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 80mm in height, 210mm in width, and 280mm in depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in the 15 Slot Disc Holder today to enhance your kitchen's efficiency and organization. Shop now for a reliable solution that keeps your food preparation process seamless and.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810650571137,"sku":"AS376","price":37.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/5d99b3a97367f1e669940d98ead51289.png?v=1781700281"},{"product_id":"1500ml-commercial-container-for-merrychef-oven-accessories","title":"1500ml Commercial Container for Oven Accessories","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Signature Range 1500ml Container is an essential accessory designed to enhance the capabilities of your oven, making it an ideal choice for both commercial kitchens and home cooks. This versatile container allows you to prepare larger volumes of dishes such as pre-cooked pasta bakes, cakes, and soups, ensuring that your culinary creativity knows no bounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable PTFE material, the container provides a reliable solution for a wide range of cooking applications. Its robust design can withstand the demands of a busy kitchen while being easy to maintain. Moreover, the non-stick surface simplifies cleaning, allowing you to focus more on your creations and less on cleanup. This container truly stands out as a reliable kitchen companion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 58.5(H) x 235(W) x 235(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e PTFE\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 277g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Blue\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIdeal for heating larger volumes of wet dishes and pre-cooked pasta bakes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAdds versatility to your oven for an expanded cooking repertoire.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for easy cleaning and is dishwasher safe for your convenience.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable and reusable, supporting sustainable kitchen practices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHigh-heat resistant construction suitable for various cooking temperatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eNon-stick surface reduces food adhesion, ensuring perfect servings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design makes it easy to handle and transfer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact size fits seamlessly in any kitchen setup.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDishwasher-safe feature promotes hassle-free maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e -lasting quality that withstands frequent use without wear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eVersatile cooking options\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrepare a variety of dishes, maximizing oven use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable and -lasting\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces the need for frequent replacements, saving you money.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to clean and maintain\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSpend less time on cleanup, focusing more on cooking.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Signature Range 1500ml Container excels in various kitchen settings, making it a valuable addition for both chefs and home cooks. Its design supports a range of applications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens where efficiency is key.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood service establishments preparing large batches of dishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens looking to streamline meal prep.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering businesses needing versatile cooking tools.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo ensure optimal use, simply place the container inside your oven during cooking. The container is designed for compatibility with the range, while regular cleaning in the dishwasher maintains its integrity and performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat dishes can I cook using the 1500ml Container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can cook a variety of wet dishes such as pasta bakes, cakes, and soups, expanding your culinary options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the container dishwasher safe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the Signature Range Container is dishwasher safe, making cleanup easy and efficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat material is the container made from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe container is made from durable PTFE, ensuring -lasting performance and easy release of food.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExperience the versatile capabilities of the Signature Range 1500ml Container and enhance your cooking efficiency. Order today and discover the difference it makes in your kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810650866049,"sku":"AU115","price":371.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/3897a7c61ca3933ae3f0ed0b2365fe8b.png?v=1781700322"},{"product_id":"150mm-commercial-adjustable-burger-press-mould-for-food-prep","title":"150mm Commercial Adjustable Burger Press Mould for Food Prep","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Adjustable Burger Press Mould 150mm is a must-have accessory for chefs and food enthusiasts looking to create perfectly shaped burgers. Designed specifically for the Multipatty adjustable burger press, this mould enables you to produce consistently high-quality 100mm burgers efficiently. Its ease of use and quick-change capability make it an invaluable tool during busy kitchen hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable stainless steel, the burger mould ensures exceptional longevity and resilience. The design solves the common problem of burger shape inconsistency by allowing you to achieve uniform results every time. With its patented self-centering technology, this mould is simple to integrate into your existing setup, enhancing your burger-making efficiency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.1kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned specifically for the Multipatty adjustable burger press.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePatented self-centering moulds couple the mould with the press buffer perfectly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStrong and easy-clean stainless steel construction saves time during cleanup.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eQuick and easy to change for seamless kitchen operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHigh-quality stainless steel construction ensures longevity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy maintenance with a straightforward cleaning process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for efficiency, boosting your burger production speed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSelf-centering feature guarantees perfectly formed burgers every time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design allows for ease of handling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBacked by a 1-year warranty for peace of mind.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e -lasting and reduces the need for frequent replacements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to change mold\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSaves time during peak hours, increasing kitchen efficiency.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSelf-centring mould design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures perfectly shaped burgers, enhancing presentation and customer satisfaction.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e1-year warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eConfidence in your purchase, knowing you're covered for any issues.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Adjustable Burger Press Mould is versatile and suitable for various settings. Whether you’re operating a bustling restaurant kitchen or preparing meals for a family gathering, this mould performs exceptionally well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurant kitchens seeking uniform burger sizes for better portion control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks specializing in gourmet burgers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome cooks wanting to impress with perfectly shaped burgers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMeal prep services providing consistent products for clients.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the burger mould is quick and straightforward. Simply attach it to your Multipatty adjustable burger press as per the user manual for perfect compatibility. Regularly clean the stainless steel surface with non-abrasive cleaners to maintain its appearance and functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat material is the Adjustable Burger Press Mould made from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mould is made from durable stainless steel, ensuring it withstands regular use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow heavy is the burger press mould?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mould weighs approximately 1.1kg, making it easy to handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat warranty comes with this product?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt includes a 1-year warranty covering parts and labour for your peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your burger-making experience with the Adjustable Burger Press Mould 150mm. Order today and take the first step towards producing perfectly formed burgers with ease.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810819817857,"sku":"FP521","price":703.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/1184711d6452133dd91bada774c32753.png?v=1781704117"},{"product_id":"150μf-start-capacitor-for-commercial-ice-cream-makers","title":"150μF Start Capacitor for Commercial Ice Cream Makers","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 150μF Start Capacitor is a crucial component for anyone using U-Series soft serve ice cream makers. This replacement capacitor is designed specifically for professionals who demand reliability and performance in their ice cream machines. With this product, you can ensure that your ice cream maker functions smoothly and consistently, delivering delightful soft serve every time.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality aluminum, this start capacitor is built to last, providing durability and strength. Weighing 160 grams, it is compact and lightweight, enhancing the efficiency of your ice cream maker. This replacement part resolves issues related to electrical performance, ensuring that your equipment starts smoothly and avoids operational hiccups. With its striking blue color, it also adds a touch of visual appeal to your equipment, distinguishing it from parts.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 100(H) x 50(W) x 50(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 160g\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Blue\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFits and models seamlessly.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEnsures reliable starting functionality for ice cream making.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to install, saving you time and effort during replacement.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to withstand the rigors of frequent use in commercial settings.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHigh durability - withstands regular usage without performance decline.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCompatibility with multiple models - versatility in fitting various machines.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eQuick installation process - minimizes downtime and keeps your business running.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEfficient electrical operation - helps reduce power consumption over time.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCompact design - allows for easy handling and integration into existing setups.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eQuality build materials - ensures -lasting performance under heavy workloads.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Cream Maker Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eReliable performance\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eConsistently churns perfect soft serve, reducing recovery time between batches.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eHigh compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eReduces need for different components, making maintenance easier.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eEasy installation\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eSaves time, allowing for quicker setups and less disruption to service.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe 150μF Start Capacitor is ideal for a variety of environments. It shines in settings where soft serve ice cream is made frequently and efficiently. \u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCommercial ice cream parlours\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants offering soft serve desserts\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCatering events and food trucks\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eSeasonal kiosks and fairs\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eAny establishment using U-Series soft serve machines\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis start capacitor is designed for straightforward installation and is compatible with and models. For best performance, ensure that the power supply is turned off before replacement. Regular checks on the capacitor can prevent unexpected outages and maintain consistent ice cream quality.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the function of the start capacitor?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe start capacitor provides the necessary to start the motor of the ice cream maker, ensuring it operates effectively.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I know if I need to replace the capacitor?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eSigns of a faulty capacitor include the machine not starting or inconsistent operation, which can affect ice cream quality.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this part compatible with other models?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis specific capacitor is designed for the and models, ensuring optimal performance in those units.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eEnsure your soft serve ice cream maker runs at peak performance with the 150μF Start Capacitor. Order today to maintain the delightful quality of your ice creams and enhance your service reliability.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810821587329,"sku":"AU550","price":106.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/f2ead70388b92080931f97329dd84556.png?v=1781704137"},{"product_id":"15cm-high-plinth-for-ergonomic-loading-of-commercial-washers","title":"15cm High Plinth for Ergonomic Loading of Commercial Washers","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Open 15cm High Plinth Iron Grey APCL 084 is an essential spare part designed to enhance the usability of laundry appliances. Tailored for both domestic and commercial users, this product significantly elevates the height of washing machines or tumble dryers, making loading and unloading more comfortable and ergonomic. By reducing strain during these tasks, it is particularly beneficial for those who frequently handle laundry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from strong galvanised steel, the Open 15cm High Plinth is built to last. Its robust design not only guarantees durability but also addresses the common issue of bending over when accessing laundry appliances. This effective solution saves time and effort, making it an indispensable addition to your laundry setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 150(H) x 602(W) x 619(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Galvanised Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 9kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Grey\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSturdy construction ensures reliable support for your appliance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIncreases loading height by 15cm, reducing bending and strain.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for consistent use, ideal for busy households or operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to install and compatible with various laundry appliances.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEnhances ergonomics, promoting a healthier posture during laundry tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable galvanised steel provides -lasting support, minimizing the need for replacements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to integrate with existing appliances, making setup straightforward.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSuitable for both residential and commercial applications, offering versatility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eQuick and easy maintenance helps keep your laundry area functional.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStylish grey finish complements modern laundry room aesthetics.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Part\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces physical strain\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eNo more bending, leading to a more comfortable laundry experience.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReliability over time ensures you get value for your investment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSimple installation\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eGet back to your laundry routine quickly without needing expert help.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eCompatible with various models\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eFlexibility to fit into your existing laundry setup.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Open 15cm High Plinth is perfect for a variety of settings and uses, including:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome laundry rooms where space and ergonomics are a concern.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial laundries needing efficient appliance access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAssisted-living facilities aiming for user-friendly laundry capabilities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSmall businesses that require frequent loading and unloading of laundry.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAny environment where convenience enhances workflow and productivity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis plinth is designed for easy installation with most laundry machines. Ensure to follow the included instructions for proper fitting. Regularly check for any loose fittings to maintain stability and support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat appliances is this plinth compatible with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Open 15cm High Plinth is designed to work with most washing machines and tumble dryers, enhancing their usability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much height does this plinth add?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis plinth raises appliances by 15cm, promoting a more comfortable loading and unloading experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat warranty does this product come with?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Open 15cm High Plinth includes a 1-year warranty covering parts and labour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTransform your laundry experience with the Open 15cm High Plinth Iron Grey APCL 084. Order today to elevate your appliance efficiency and comfort!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810822078849,"sku":"AT242","price":1519.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/b05d78a7527019a04389470b4ea0df74.png?v=1781704149"},{"product_id":"16l-commercial-external-water-softener-for-dishwashers","title":"16L Commercial External Water Softener for Dishwashers","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 16Ltr Base Exchange External Water Softener is an essential component for those operating larger dishwashers such as the dishwasher, and models. This water softener ensures that only clean, contaminant-free water enters your washing cycle, resulting in pristine dishes and cutlery. By efficiently reducing limescale buildup, it also minimizes costly maintenance associated with machine repairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable stainless steel, the water softener is designed to withstand the rigors of the kitchen environment while delivering exceptional performance. The effective ion exchange system not only combats limescale but also enhances the longevity of your dishwasher. With its no-electricity requirement and simple integration into existing systems, this external water softener stands out as a practical solution for any commercial kitchen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 620(H) x 180(W)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 20kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHigh delivery rate of 800 litres per hour for extensive washing needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eOperates using granulated dishwasher salt for effective softening.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIdeal for areas where water hardness exceeds 7° Clark (100 ppm).\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eNo electricity supply is needed, simplifying installation and operation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIncreases washing efficiency by providing soft water for optimal results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eReduces limescale buildup, prolonging the life of your dishwasher.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design makes installation and relocation hassle-free.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCost-effective solution that minimizes ongoing maintenance expenses.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with a range of washer models, enhancing versatility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCold fill capability supports water temperatures up to 35°C.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEffective limescale reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eFewer disruptions and repairs to your washing equipment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eNo electricity required\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSimplified installation in various kitchen setups.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHigh water delivery capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMeets the demands of busy commercial kitchens efficiently.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnsures long-term reliability and resilience in busy environments.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 16Ltr Base Exchange External Water Softener is an excellent choice for various settings where high-quality dishwashing is essential. This includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens in restaurants\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCafés and bistros\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHotels and catering services\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood processing facilities\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIndustrial kitchens\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis water softener is easy to install alongside your dishwashers. It requires minimal maintenance, primarily involving the periodic replacement of granulated dishwasher salt based on usage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat type of salt does the water softener use?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe water softener uses granulated dishwasher salt for optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does the water softener connect to my dishwasher?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe water softener integrates into the existing water supply line of your dishwasher, ensuring a seamless operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the maximum water hardness this product can accommodate?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is designed to operate effectively in water with hardness levels exceeding 7° Clark (100 ppm).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance the effectiveness of your dishwashing process with the 16Ltr Base Exchange External Water Softener. Order today to experience cleaner dishes and reduced maintenance costs!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810825290113,"sku":"FB152","price":969.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/338c6a1c16c6f546c53c9c4753894dfa.png?v=1781704217"},{"product_id":"18-commercial-fryer-lid-replacement-part-silver-finish","title":"18\" Commercial Fryer Lid Replacement Part Silver Finish","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 18\" Fryer Lid is an essential component for commercial kitchens, designed specifically for those who require reliable and efficient frying solutions. This lid is the perfect addition for chefs and kitchen operators looking to enhance their frying processes while maintaining a clean and safe working environment. With a focus on durability and ease of use, this fryer lid makes cooking with a fryer a seamless experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from high-quality silver materials, the fryer lid is built to withstand the demands of everyday use. It effectively prevents splashes and spills, significantly reducing the risk of accidents in busy kitchen settings. The sturdy construction ensures longevity, giving users peace of mind that their investment will stand the test of time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned to fit snugly, minimizing heat loss and maximizing cooking efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, ensuring food safety and compliance with health regulations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight yet strong construction allows for easy handling and storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with a variety of fryers, making it a versatile addition to any kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable construction ensures -lasting performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for safety, reducing the risk of kitchen accidents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient heat retention facilitates quicker cooking times.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSimple to install and maintain, making it user-friendly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile use, adaptable to different commercial frying needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eOne-year warranty provides reassurance of quality and reliability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e lifespan reduces replacement costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to Clean\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHelps maintain hygiene standards in your kitchen.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient Cooking\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSaves time and increases productivity during service.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSafety Features\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMinimizes the risk of burns or accidents while cooking.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 18\" Fryer Lid is perfect for a variety of culinary settings and operational needs. Here are a few places where this fryer lid truly shines:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens in restaurants and catering services.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks and pop-up kitchens requiring portable frying solutions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEvent spaces catering to large groups, where efficiency is key.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFast food establishments looking to streamline frying operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the fryer lid is straightforward, making it easy for kitchen staff to integrate it into their existing frying setup. Maintenance is minimal; simply clean the lid regularly to keep it in optimal condition, ensuring it remains free from grease and food residues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the fryer lid compatible with all fryer models?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhile the fryer lid is designed to fit most fryers, it's recommended to check specific dimensions for compatibility with your unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the fryer lid effectively?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lid can be cleaned easily with warm soapy water or a degreaser to maintain hygiene standards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat type of warranty is offered with the fryer lid?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product comes with a one-year warranty, which covers manufacturing defects and ensures peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvesting in the 18\" Fryer Lid means enhancing your kitchen's efficiency while providing safety and ease of use. Order today to take your frying experience to new heights.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810826731905,"sku":"HZ496","price":1087.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/006418972d3c76a37c57d203696061ae.png?v=1781704260"},{"product_id":"18-ltr-aluminium-inner-pot-for-commercial-rice-cooker","title":"18 Ltr Aluminium Inner Pot for Commercial Rice Cooker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Inner Pot is an essential replacement part specifically designed for rice cookers. Ideal for catering professionals and home cooks alike, this pot enhances cooking efficiency and ensures consistent results every time. With its thoughtful design and durable construction, it offers a perfect solution for those looking to maintain their rice cooker's performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality aluminium, the inner pot is built to withstand the demands of regular use in busy kitchens. It solves the common problem of wear and tear experienced with pots, extending the life of your rice cooker. Unlike other pots, the Inner Pot is engineered for optimal heat distribution, ensuring your rice is cooked evenly and efficiently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 18 Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 215(H) x 350(W) x 350(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.38kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design for easy handling and transport.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCorrosion-resistant material ensures longevity and easy cleaning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile sizing fits a variety of rice cooker models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient cooking for large batches, perfect for events or family meals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSturdy aluminium construction for reliable performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLarge capacity caters to high-volume cooking needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions enable efficient storage in busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight for effortless handling during food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurability ensures consistent cooking results with every use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with multiple models, increasing utility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Rice Cooker Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHigh heat conductivity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eRice cooks evenly without hot spots.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable build quality\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduced need for replacement saves money over time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLightweight design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMakes maneuvering in the kitchen quick and easy.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eLarge capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePerfect for catering larger groups or family meals.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Inner Pot excels in various settings, making it a versatile choice for anyone who loves cooking rice. Whether you're a chef or a home cook, this inner pot is designed for extensive usage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCatering events where large volumes of rice need to be prepared.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants that serve rice dishes as a staple offering.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFamily gatherings requiring the preparation of sides for multiple guests.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks or mobile kitchens that need efficient cooking tools.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens looking to streamline meal prep for busy weeknights.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor best results, ensure that the inner pot is properly seated in the rice cooker before use. Regular cleaning is recommended to maintain optimal performance, as well as to prevent any buildup of residue that could affect cooking quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhat is the capacity of the Inner Pot?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity of the Inner Pot is 18 liters, making it suitable for large meals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the inner pot?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe inner pot measures 215mm in height, 350mm in width, and 350mm in depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhat material is the pot made from?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe inner pot is constructed from high-quality aluminium, providing durability and efficient heat distribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your cooking experience with the Inner Pot. Its thoughtful design and durable materials make it an essential addition to your kitchen. Order today and enhance your rice cooking efficiency!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810826797441,"sku":"AC393","price":170.38,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/0b16de18757df8e77957c5e2983dc2b4.png?v=1781704261"},{"product_id":"18-commercial-fryer-lid-replacement-part-silver-finish-1","title":"18\" Commercial Fryer Lid Replacement Part Silver Finish","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 18\" Fryer Lid is an essential component for commercial kitchens, designed specifically for those who require reliable and efficient frying solutions. This lid is the perfect addition for chefs and kitchen operators looking to enhance their frying processes while maintaining a clean and safe working environment. With a focus on durability and ease of use, this fryer lid makes cooking with a fryer a seamless experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from high-quality silver materials, the fryer lid is built to withstand the demands of everyday use. It effectively prevents splashes and spills, significantly reducing the risk of accidents in busy kitchen settings. The sturdy construction ensures longevity, giving users peace of mind that their investment will stand the test of time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned to fit snugly, minimizing heat loss and maximizing cooking efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, ensuring food safety and compliance with health regulations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight yet strong construction allows for easy handling and storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with a variety of fryers, making it a versatile addition to any kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable construction ensures -lasting performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned for safety, reducing the risk of kitchen accidents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient heat retention facilitates quicker cooking times.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSimple to install and maintain, making it user-friendly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eVersatile use, adaptable to different commercial frying needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eOne-year warranty provides reassurance of quality and reliability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e lifespan reduces replacement costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy to Clean\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHelps maintain hygiene standards in your kitchen.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient Cooking\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSaves time and increases productivity during service.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSafety Features\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMinimizes the risk of burns or accidents while cooking.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 18\" Fryer Lid is perfect for a variety of culinary settings and operational needs. Here are a few places where this fryer lid truly shines:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens in restaurants and catering services.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFood trucks and pop-up kitchens requiring portable frying solutions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEvent spaces catering to large groups, where efficiency is key.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFast food establishments looking to streamline frying operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the fryer lid is straightforward, making it easy for kitchen staff to integrate it into their existing frying setup. Maintenance is minimal; simply clean the lid regularly to keep it in optimal condition, ensuring it remains free from grease and food residues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the fryer lid compatible with all fryer models?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhile the fryer lid is designed to fit most fryers, it's recommended to check specific dimensions for compatibility with your unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the fryer lid effectively?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lid can be cleaned easily with warm soapy water or a degreaser to maintain hygiene standards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat type of warranty is offered with the fryer lid?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product comes with a one-year warranty, which covers manufacturing defects and ensures peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvesting in the 18\" Fryer Lid means enhancing your kitchen's efficiency while providing safety and ease of use. Order today to take your frying experience to new heights.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810828370305,"sku":"HZ496","price":1087.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/006418972d3c76a37c57d203696061ae_30841bac-77c4-454e-a831-7b90c66322a2.png?v=1781704338"},{"product_id":"180mm-commercial-burger-press-mould-for-adjustable-patty-shape","title":"180mm Commercial Burger Press Mould for Adjustable Patty Shape","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Adjustable Burger Press Mould 180mm is an essential tool for any culinary enthusiast or chef looking to create perfectly shaped burgers. Designed specifically for use with the Multipatty adjustable burger press, this 180mm mould ensures that every burger reaches an impressive 100mm diameter, making it ideal for serving consistent, satisfying portions. With its robust build and ease of use, this accessory simplifies the burger-making process, allowing you to focus on quality and taste.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality stainless steel, the burger press mould offers durability and resistance to wear and tear, solving the problem of uneven or misshaped burgers during preparation. The effortless interchangeability of the mould during busy cooking times ensures that you can maintain your workflow without interruption. Its -grade design not only meets the rigorous demands of commercial kitchens but also brings precision to home cooking.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.2kg\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFor use with Multipatty adjustable burger press for seamless integration.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003ePatented self-centring mould design ensures a perfect fit with minimal effort.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eStrong construction is built to withstand the demands of a busy kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to change, allowing for swift transitions between preparations.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEnhances productivity by allowing quick and efficient burger preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eStreamlined design reduces the risk of mess and waste.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eVersatile use across various types of ground meats and vegetarian options.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, promoting hygiene and food safety standards.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with multiple burger sizes for diverse meal options.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDurable construction assures longevity for extended use in any kitchen environment.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel material\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eEnsures -term reliability and performance in busy kitchens.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eSimple mould replacement\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eAllows for quick transitions between different burger sizes or types.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003ePatented design\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eGuarantees consistent shape and size for every burger without hassle.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis burger press mould excels in various cooking scenarios, making it a versatile addition to your kitchen tools. Whether you're preparing for a backyard barbecue or a bustling restaurant service, this mould is up to the task.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants and cafes looking to streamline burger production.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHome kitchens focused on high-quality meal preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks that serve a variety of gourmet burgers.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEvent catering for parties and large gatherings.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eGrill masters who demand perfection in every patty.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eChanging out the mould is a straightforward process, ideal for maintaining efficiency in busy cooking environments. Simply remove the current mould and replace it with the new one to continue crafting your signature burgers seamlessly.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat types of meat can I use with this burger mould?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis mould is compatible with a variety of ground meats as well as vegetarian options, allowing for diverse burger creations.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the burger press mould?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe stainless steel construction makes it easy to clean. It is recommended to wash it with warm, soapy water and a soft cloth.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the mould easy to change during busy prep times?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eYes, the design allows for quick and effortless mould changes, which is essential during high-volume cooking periods.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the Adjustable Burger Press Mould 180mm, you can achieve perfectly shaped burgers with ease and efficiency. Don't compromise on quality; order today to elevate your burger-making experience.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810828632449,"sku":"FP522","price":751.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/b413795fe0494040025d96b069704790.png?v=1781704352"},{"product_id":"1ltr-container-and-lid-for-commercial-stick-blender","title":"1Ltr Container and Lid for Commercial Stick Blender","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 1Ltr Container and Lid is an essential component for anyone aiming to optimize their culinary efficiency with a stick blender. Designed specifically for use with stick blenders, this container is perfect for chefs and home cooks alike, allowing for seamless blending, mixing, and preparation of ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality materials, the container and lid are designed for durability and easy handling, ensuring that they withstand regular use in busy kitchens. The container resolves common blending issues by providing a stable, reliable container that maximizes blending efficiency and minimizes mess, making your food preparation faster and easier.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 300g\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e1 x Container – 1 liter capacity\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e1 x Lid – secure fitting\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eMade for compatibility with stick blenders\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eLightweight design for easy handling\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eTransparent base for easy visibility of contents\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to clean for fast turnaround\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDurable construction ensures longevity and repeated use, providing value over time.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eLightweight design allows for easy handling and maneuvering during food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eTransparent container allows users to monitor blending progress without opening.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eSecure fitting lid reduces spills and preserves freshness of blended ingredients.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for optimal performance with stick blenders, enhancing blending efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, making it a practical choice for busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Stick Blender Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurability\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eMeans fewer replacements and -term savings.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eAllows for comfortable handling, reducing strain during use.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSecure lid\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003ePrevents spills, ensuring a cleaner cooking environment.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFacilitates easy monitoring, resulting in better recipe outcomes.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe 1Ltr Container and Lid excels in various settings, making it a versatile choice for many culinary tasks. It is particularly beneficial in the following environments:\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e kitchens – ideal for chefs preparing large quantities.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHome cooking – perfect for everyday meal preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCatering services – suitable for mixing blends for events.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFood processing facilities – used in creating consistent mixtures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCooking demonstrations – helps showcase blending techniques clearly.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eEnsure the container fits securely with your stick blender for optimal use. Cleaning is straightforward – simply wash the container and lid with warm, soapy water or place them in a dishwasher for added convenience.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the capacity of the container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe container has a capacity of 1 liter, making it suitable for various blending tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the lid secure during blending?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eYes, the lid fits securely to prevent spills while using the blender.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the weight of the container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe container weighs 300g, providing a lightweight yet sturdy option for handling ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eExperience the convenience and efficiency of the 1Ltr Container and Lid in your kitchen. It streamlines your blending process, ensuring that your culinary creations are not only delicious but also easily prepared. Order today to enhance your kitchen experience!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810836857217,"sku":"AE039","price":81.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/9739bc86e9b8c7c7f6332549f0227d95.png?v=1781704444"},{"product_id":"180mm-commercial-burger-press-mould-for-adjustable-patty-shape-1","title":"180mm Commercial Burger Press Mould for Adjustable Patty Shape","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Adjustable Burger Press Mould 180mm is an essential tool for any culinary enthusiast or chef looking to create perfectly shaped burgers. Designed specifically for use with the Multipatty adjustable burger press, this 180mm mould ensures that every burger reaches an impressive 100mm diameter, making it ideal for serving consistent, satisfying portions. With its robust build and ease of use, this accessory simplifies the burger-making process, allowing you to focus on quality and taste.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality stainless steel, the burger press mould offers durability and resistance to wear and tear, solving the problem of uneven or misshaped burgers during preparation. The effortless interchangeability of the mould during busy cooking times ensures that you can maintain your workflow without interruption. Its -grade design not only meets the rigorous demands of commercial kitchens but also brings precision to home cooking.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.2kg\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Stainless Steel\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty\u003c\/strong\u003e 1 Year Parts \u0026amp; Labour\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFor use with Multipatty adjustable burger press for seamless integration.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003ePatented self-centring mould design ensures a perfect fit with minimal effort.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eStrong construction is built to withstand the demands of a busy kitchen.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to change, allowing for swift transitions between preparations.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEnhances productivity by allowing quick and efficient burger preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eStreamlined design reduces the risk of mess and waste.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eVersatile use across various types of ground meats and vegetarian options.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, promoting hygiene and food safety standards.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with multiple burger sizes for diverse meal options.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDurable construction assures longevity for extended use in any kitchen environment.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Spare Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eDurable stainless steel material\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eEnsures -term reliability and performance in busy kitchens.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eSimple mould replacement\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eAllows for quick transitions between different burger sizes or types.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003ePatented design\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eGuarantees consistent shape and size for every burger without hassle.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis burger press mould excels in various cooking scenarios, making it a versatile addition to your kitchen tools. Whether you're preparing for a backyard barbecue or a bustling restaurant service, this mould is up to the task.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants and cafes looking to streamline burger production.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHome kitchens focused on high-quality meal preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFood trucks that serve a variety of gourmet burgers.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEvent catering for parties and large gatherings.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eGrill masters who demand perfection in every patty.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eChanging out the mould is a straightforward process, ideal for maintaining efficiency in busy cooking environments. Simply remove the current mould and replace it with the new one to continue crafting your signature burgers seamlessly.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat types of meat can I use with this burger mould?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThis mould is compatible with a variety of ground meats as well as vegetarian options, allowing for diverse burger creations.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I clean the burger press mould?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe stainless steel construction makes it easy to clean. It is recommended to wash it with warm, soapy water and a soft cloth.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the mould easy to change during busy prep times?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eYes, the design allows for quick and effortless mould changes, which is essential during high-volume cooking periods.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the Adjustable Burger Press Mould 180mm, you can achieve perfectly shaped burgers with ease and efficiency. Don't compromise on quality; order today to elevate your burger-making experience.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810868642177,"sku":"FP522","price":751.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/b413795fe0494040025d96b069704790_71faa076-556c-4eac-be13-356d1b9fc7b4.png?v=1781704906"},{"product_id":"1ltr-container-and-lid-for-commercial-stick-blender-1","title":"1Ltr Container and Lid for Commercial Stick Blender","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 1Ltr Container and Lid is an essential component for anyone aiming to optimize their culinary efficiency with a stick blender. Designed specifically for use with stick blenders, this container is perfect for chefs and home cooks alike, allowing for seamless blending, mixing, and preparation of ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality materials, the container and lid are designed for durability and easy handling, ensuring that they withstand regular use in busy kitchens. The container resolves common blending issues by providing a stable, reliable container that maximizes blending efficiency and minimizes mess, making your food preparation faster and easier.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 300g\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e1 x Container – 1 liter capacity\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e1 x Lid – secure fitting\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eMade for compatibility with stick blenders\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eLightweight design for easy handling\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eTransparent base for easy visibility of contents\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to clean for fast turnaround\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDurable construction ensures longevity and repeated use, providing value over time.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eLightweight design allows for easy handling and maneuvering during food preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eTransparent container allows users to monitor blending progress without opening.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eSecure fitting lid reduces spills and preserves freshness of blended ingredients.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for optimal performance with stick blenders, enhancing blending efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, making it a practical choice for busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Stick Blender Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003ctable\u003e \n\u003cthead\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e \n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003c\/thead\u003e \n\u003ctbody\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurability\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eMeans fewer replacements and -term savings.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003eAllows for comfortable handling, reducing strain during use.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSecure lid\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003ctd\u003ePrevents spills, ensuring a cleaner cooking environment.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e \n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFacilitates easy monitoring, resulting in better recipe outcomes.\u003c\/td\u003e \n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e \n\u003c\/table\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe 1Ltr Container and Lid excels in various settings, making it a versatile choice for many culinary tasks. It is particularly beneficial in the following environments:\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cul\u003e \n\u003cli\u003e kitchens – ideal for chefs preparing large quantities.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eHome cooking – perfect for everyday meal preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eCatering services – suitable for mixing blends for events.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003cli\u003eFood processing facilities – used in creating consistent mixtures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCooking demonstrations – helps showcase blending techniques clearly.\u003c\/li\u003e \n\u003c\/ul\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eEnsure the container fits securely with your stick blender for optimal use. Cleaning is straightforward – simply wash the container and lid with warm, soapy water or place them in a dishwasher for added convenience.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e \n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the capacity of the container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe container has a capacity of 1 liter, making it suitable for various blending tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the lid secure during blending?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eYes, the lid fits securely to prevent spills while using the blender.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the weight of the container?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e \n\u003cp\u003eThe container weighs 300g, providing a lightweight yet sturdy option for handling ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e \n\n\u003cp\u003eExperience the convenience and efficiency of the 1Ltr Container and Lid in your kitchen. It streamlines your blending process, ensuring that your culinary creations are not only delicious but also easily prepared. Order today to enhance your kitchen experience!\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810873655681,"sku":"AE039","price":81.58,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/9739bc86e9b8c7c7f6332549f0227d95_425d8cdd-bdce-4dd2-b0b8-20ecce206792.png?v=1781704956"},{"product_id":"1m-milk-tube-for-commercial-drink-dispenser-milk-cooler","title":"1M Milk Tube for Commercial Drink Dispenser Milk Cooler","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 1M Milk Tube is an essential component for your G Series 4.5ltr milk cooler, designed for operations in cafes, restaurants, and catering services that require efficient and reliable milk dispensing. This genuine replacement part ensures that your milk cooler remains fully functional, maintaining the quality and consistency of your service while allowing for seamless milk flow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable silicone, this milk tube addresses the common wear and tear that can occur in busy environments. Its lightweight design and easy installation set it apart from other parts on the market, making it a convenient solution for anyone needing a quick and reliable replacement to keep their milk dispensing system running smoothly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 8(H) x 1000(W) x 8(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Silicone\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 20g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eFlexible silicone construction allows for easy maneuvering during installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design makes handling and modifications effortless.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable material ensures -lasting performance under daily use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with G Series 4.5ltr milk coolers for a seamless fit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGenuine replacement part ensures compatibility and quality.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eMade from silicone, preventing leaks and ensuring cleanliness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned specifically for milk dispensing, it provides consistent flow.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompact size makes storage and transport simple.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient installation process saves time in maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eReplaces worn tubes to maintain hygienic standards in food service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Drink Dispenser Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eGenuine replacement ensures quality\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReliable performance that meets industry standards.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable silicone material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eReduces the need for frequent replacements, saving money.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy installation\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMinimal downtime and quick setup, so you can get back to serving customers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDesigned for G Series\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePerfect fit guarantees functionality without issues.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1M Milk Tube is versatile and excels in various environments. Here are some ideal uses:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePerfect for coffee shops needing efficient milk dispensing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGreat for restaurants serving milk-based beverages.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEssential in catering settings to ensure milk is dispensed smoothly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIdeal for busy kitchens with high milk usage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation of the 1M Milk Tube is straightforward, designed to fit securely into your G Series milk cooler. Regular cleaning and inspection will help maintain its performance and extend its lifespan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the length of the 1M Milk Tube?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt measures 1 meter (1000mm) in length, providing ample reach for dispensing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat material is the milk tube made of?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe milk tube is made from high-quality silicone, which is known for its flexibility and durability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the 1M milk tube compatible with other brands?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, this milk tube is specifically designed for use with G Series 4.5ltr milk coolers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnsure your beverage service runs without a hitch by replacing old, worn-out parts with the 1M Milk Tube. Order today to maintain quality in your milk dispensing.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810874212737,"sku":"AS627","price":14.86,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/81b7a6553523797a204a7851357ced0a.png?v=1781704962"},{"product_id":"2-litre-commercial-bar-blender-jug-for-silent-drinks-maker","title":"2 Litre Commercial Bar Blender Jug for Silent Drinks Maker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 62A Yellow Jug 62100Y is an essential addition to any bar or kitchen where the 62A silent drinks maker is in use. Designed for those who value both functionality and aesthetics, this yellow jug enhances your drink presentation while helping to prevent cross-contamination of allergens. With its striking color, it’s an excellent choice for establishments that prioritize a visually appealing front-of-house color scheme.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality, BPA-free polyester, the 62100Y jug is not only durable but also safe for your customers. Its generous 2-litre capacity matches the jug size, allowing for efficient blending and serving of drinks. The jug’s robust design and compatibility with the 62A make it a reliable choice for both professionals and home enthusiasts alike, distinguishing it from lesser alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 250(H) x 160(W) x 160(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Co polyester\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 785g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Yellow\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStackable for easy storage and organization.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStrong TiN coated blade ensures longevity and cutting efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eTwo-way rotation of the blade is ideal for creating smooth frozen drinks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGraduation markings in ml and oz for precise measurements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBright yellow color enhances visual appeal and aligns with branding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBPA-free material provides peace of mind regarding food safety.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStackable design optimizes storage space, perfect for busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStrong blade technology allows for easy blending of hard and frozen ingredients.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eClear graduation markings simplify portioning and recipe adherence.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with the 62A, ensuring seamless operation and efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Bar Blender Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHigh-quality BPA-free material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSafe and reliable for food and beverage preparation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable and robust design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e -lasting use, saving on replacement costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEfficient two-way blade rotation\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eAchieve perfectly blended drinks every time.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 62A Yellow Jug is versatile and excels in various settings, making it a valuable tool for any culinary expert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIdeal for smoothie bars, ensuring allergen-free drink preparation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePerfect for cocktail mixing in busy bars and restaurants.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGreat for health-conscious establishments focusing on fresh juices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eUseful in cafes that feature vibrant color themes and drink presentations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis jug seamlessly fits with the 62A silent drinks maker, ensuring easy installation. Regular cleaning and maintenance will extend its lifespan, keeping it in optimal working condition for all your blending needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat material is the 62100Y jug made from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe jug is made from co polyester, which is BPA-free and safe for food use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the capacity of the Yellow Jug?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe jug has a capacity of 2 litres, which matches the size for optimal blending.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the Yellow Jug compatible with other products?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis jug is specifically designed to work with the 62A silent drinks maker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eElevate your drink preparation process with the 62A Yellow Jug 62100Y. Its high-quality construction and vibrant color make it a must-have for and home use alike. Order today and enjoy the benefits of a versatile and reliable blending solution.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810874376577,"sku":"CY565","price":544.78,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/daaa707ad874dc08a742b9f37cf4baa8.png?v=1781704963"},{"product_id":"2-litre-commercial-blender-jug-for-santos-62a-drinks-maker","title":"2 Litre Commercial Blender Jug for 62A Drinks Maker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe 62A Red Jug 62100R is an essential part for your bar blender, designed for both and home use. This high-quality jug is not only functional but also aesthetically appealing, allowing you to maintain a consistent front-of-house décor while ensuring optimal performance in your blending tasks. With its vibrant red color, it offers a fresh look while serving a practical purpose in preventing cross-contamination of allergens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from durable BPA-free co-polyester, the 62100R jug boasts a generous 2-litre capacity that matches the jug size. This reliable jug helps in preparing a variety of beverages, ensuring smooth operations in any setting. Additionally, its strong build quality promises longevity and resilience against everyday wear and tear, making it an indispensable partner for your blending needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 250(H) x 160(W) x 160(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e Co polyester\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 785g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Red\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStackable design for easy storage and organization.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eTwo-way rotation of the blade enables effective blending of frozen drinks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGraduation markings in ml and oz for accurate measuring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eBPA-free material ensures safe food contact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCompatible with 62A blender for seamless integration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eStrong TiN coated blade for efficient blending and durability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned to prevent allergen cross-contamination.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight design for easy handling and pouring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePerfect for creating a range of beverages, from smoothies to sauces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Bar Blender Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHigh-quality construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable for -term use and reliable blending.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003e2-litre capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003ePrepare larger batches, ideal for bars and restaurants.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eVibrant red design\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnhances the visual appeal of your service area.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eBPA-free material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSafe for food preparation, ensuring customer health.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned for versatility, the 62100R red jug excels in various settings. Whether you're in a bustling café, a cozy restaurant, or catering events, this jug is built to meet your needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003ePerfect for blending smoothies in cafés.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIdeal for creating cocktails or frozen drinks in bars.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSuitable for making sauces or soups in restaurants.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eGreat for home blending, ensuring allergen separation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo maintain optimal performance, ensure that the jug is securely attached to the blender during use. Clean it regularly to prevent residue buildup and to keep your mixing environment sanitary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhat is the capacity of the 62A Red Jug 62100R?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe jug has a capacity of 2 litres, making it suitable for various blending tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIs the materials used in the jug safe for food contact?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the 62100R jug is made of BPA-free co-polyester, ensuring it is safe for food use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCan this jug be used with other blender models?\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis jug is specifically designed for the 62A silent drinks maker, ensuring optimal compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in the 62A Red Jug 62100R today, and experience the difference it makes in your blending tasks. Order now and elevate your beverage preparation process.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810874442113,"sku":"CY564","price":511.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/8c30671659bfc74a3a9fb13e03e25c01.png?v=1781704964"},{"product_id":"2-ltr-commercial-ice-cream-pot-for-ice-cream-maker","title":"2 Ltr Commercial Ice Cream Pot for Ice Cream Maker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Ice Cream Pot is a vital accessory for those who own the Upright Ice Cream Maker. Designed for both enthusiasts and professionals, this replacement part ensures that you can continue creating delicious homemade ice cream without interruption. With a generous 2-liter capacity, this pot allows you to make large batches of your favorite ice cream flavors, catering to friends and family or satisfying your own cravings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConstructed from high-quality materials, the Ice Cream Pot delivers durability and reliability, making it a smart investment for anyone who regularly prepares frozen treats. This genuine replacement part eliminates the hassle of messy spills and inadequate storage, allowing you to focus on crafting the perfect consistency and flavor every time you churn. Its compatibility with the means you can seamlessly fit it into your current ice cream-making setup for consistent results.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 Ltr\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 460g\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDurable construction ensures -lasting use and performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEasy to clean, making maintenance quick and hassle-free.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eDesigned specifically for optimal use with the model.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eAllows for large ice cream production, ideal for gatherings or parties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eEfficient design helps achieve the ideal texture in ice cream.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eLightweight structure allows for easy handling and transfer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCreates fewer air pockets, resulting in smoother ice cream.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eSimple installation process without the need for extra tools.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eReputable design enhances overall ice cream maker functionality.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eReliable Replacement guarantees peace of mind during use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Ice Cream Maker Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n \u003cthead\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/thead\u003e\n \u003ctbody\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eHigh Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eMake more ice cream at once to serve a crowd or stock up for later.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDurable Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEnjoy a -lasting product that can withstand regular use in your kitchen.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eEasy Maintenance\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eSpend more time enjoying your creations and less time cleaning up.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003ctr\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003ctd\u003eDesigned to fit seamlessly with the, ensuring perfect results.\u003c\/td\u003e\n \u003c\/tr\u003e\n \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ice Cream Pot excels in various settings, making it a versatile addition to any kitchen. Here are some ideal uses:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eHome kitchens for family ice cream nights.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eCafés offering homemade ice cream options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eRestaurants looking to create unique dessert offerings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n \u003cli\u003eIce cream parlors needing reliable replacement parts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the Ice Cream Pot is a straightforward process, simply removing the old pot and replacing it with the new one. Regular care includes occasional checks for cleanliness and ensuring the sealing mechanisms are intact to maintain optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the capacity of the Ice Cream Pot?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ice Cream Pot has a capacity of 2 liters, allowing for ample ice cream production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this pot easy to clean?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is designed for easy cleaning, helping you save time after ice cream preparation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes this pot fit other ice cream maker models?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, it is specifically designed for use with the Upright Ice Cream Maker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvest in the Ice Cream Pot today and enjoy the seamless creation of your favorite frozen treats. Whether you’re treating guests or indulging in a personal scoop, this reliable part is your gateway to delicious homemade ice cream.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810874540417,"sku":"AG687","price":98.38,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/633708a976a615e9297902fbea2f7367.png?v=1781704968"},{"product_id":"2-5ltr-commercial-bar-blender-spare-jug-for-smoothies-and-cocktails","title":"2.5Ltr Commercial Bar Blender Spare Jug for Smoothies and Cocktails","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bar Blender Spare Jug 2.5Ltr is an essential component for those who frequently operate a bar blender in fast-paced environments. Designed for bar and kitchen professionals, this spare jug enhances your operational efficiency, ensuring that you can maintain a steady flow of blended beverages during peak service times. With an additional jug at your disposal, cleaning times are eliminated between different drink preparations, allowing you to cater to diverse menu offerings seamlessly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis spare jug is crafted from durable, BPA-free plastic, designed to withstand the rigors of daily use. The 2.5L capacity ensures ample room for blending smoothies, cocktails, and sauces, addressing the common problems of downtime and cleanliness. Whether you’re mixing a refreshing smoothie or a signature cocktail, the Bar Blender Spare Jug simplifies the process, providing an uninterrupted blend experience so you can keep your customers satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProduct Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCapacity\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.5Ltr | 88oz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e 330(H) x 155(W) x 165(D)mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial\u003c\/strong\u003e BPA-Free Plastic\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.25kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColour\u003c\/strong\u003e Transparent\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFits various models including,,, and.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTime-saving design that speeds up service during busy periods.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIdeal as a replacement jug if your current one gets lost or damaged.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBPA-free construction ensures safety for all types of beverages.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeat-resistant material allows for use with hot ingredients.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTransparent design makes it easy to monitor blending progress.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with multiple blender models, providing versatility for various setups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand wash only to maintain the integrity of the blade mechanism.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight for easy handling and maneuverability in busy kitchens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Choose This Kitchen Blender Parts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBenefit\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat It Means For You\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMultiple jugs available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEliminates downtime from cleaning, leading to faster service.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBPA-free plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafe and non-toxic for preparing beverages.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed up blending\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMeeting customer demand becomes easier even during peak hours.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible with various models\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAllows for flexibility in equipment usage across different setups.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eApplications and Ideal Uses\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bar Blender Spare Jug excels in various settings where quick and efficient blending is required. It's particularly beneficial in environments such as:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBars serving a wide variety of cocktails.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCafes and juice bars preparing fresh smoothies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRestaurants creating sauces and dressings in bulk.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvent catering where drinks need to be prepared quickly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCommercial kitchens that demand high-output blending.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eInstallation and Care\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo ensure longevity and optimal performance, hand wash the jug only with warm water and mild detergent. Avoid placing it in a dishwasher, and never soak it or leave the base in water to prevent malfunction of the blade mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the capacity of the Bar Blender Spare Jug?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe jug has a capacity of 2.5Ltr, which is perfect for large blending tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the jug safe for hot liquids?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the jug is made from heat-resistant BPA-free plastic, making it suitable for blending hot ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan this jug be used with any blender?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis jug is compatible with several blender models, including,,, and.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your blending efficiency and service speed with the Bar Blender Spare Jug 2.5Ltr. Order today to ensure your kitchen or bar is always ready to meet customer demands smoothly.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Express Catering","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55810876342657,"sku":"CS052","price":247.18,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0581\/2106\/0503\/files\/0c4b4d93d11995e170cc88f32970f77f.png?v=1781704977"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.questorm.co.uk\/collections\/ns-app-spares-and-accessories.oembed?page=202","provider":"Questrom Ltd","version":"1.0","type":"link"}